ajout de la trame principale et de la première version potable du manuel FR.
1
FR_fr/commande.compilation.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
|||||||
|
pandoc -f markdown -t pdf markdown-le-mini-guide.md -o markdown-le-mini-guide.pdf --top-level-division=chapter --number-sections -H markdown-le-mini-guide-headers.heads -B markdown-le-mini-guide-before.tex
|
22
FR_fr/essai-debile-headers.tex
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
|
|||||||
|
\usepackage[]{ucs}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[fontsize=12pt]{fontsize}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[]{palatino}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[french]{babel}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[]{hyperref}
|
||||||
|
\hypersetup{
|
||||||
|
colorlinks=true,
|
||||||
|
linkcolor=blue,
|
||||||
|
urlcolor=blue,
|
||||||
|
filecolor=blue
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
\urlstyle{same}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[b5paper,left=25mm, right=25mm, top=25mm, bottom=25mm]{geometry}
|
||||||
|
%\usepackage[]{}
|
||||||
|
%\usepackage[]{}
|
||||||
|
%\usepackage[]{}
|
||||||
|
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.125}
|
||||||
|
%\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Roman{section}}
|
||||||
|
\setlength{\parskip}{0.5em}
|
||||||
|
\date{}
|
||||||
|
\author{\textbackslash{}Moane}
|
||||||
|
\title{La pandémie de \bsc{Covid-19} et la corruption organisée par Venerström Intl.}
|
18
FR_fr/essai-debile-title.tex
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
|
|||||||
|
\begin{titlepage}
|
||||||
|
\maketitle{}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\begin{abstract}
|
||||||
|
Ceci est un article traitant de l'usage du numérique pendant les phases de confinement de la Covid-19 ainsi que l'évolution possible de tout cet usage numérique.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Cet article utilise de nombreux outils mis en place par un système corruptif impliquant de nombreux membres du parlement, ainsi que quelques uns du gouvernement.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Contrairement aux anciennes accusations que nous portions dans le numéro 2031 de la revue \emph{Millenium}, qui fûrent démontées au tribunal par l'armée d'avocats qui a envoyé en prison pour 6 mois un de nos enquêteurs journalistes avec une amende très conséquente de plus de 60~000 couronnes finlandaises, nous avançons cette fois-ci des preuves solides et irréfutables, nous ne craignons aucune mise en examen, confiants que nous sommes sur l'issu de toute sorte de procès qui pourrait nous être intenté suite à la publication de ce numéro spécial.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Comme d'habitude cher lecteur et chère lectrice, nous vous avons concocté le meilleur afin de vous régaler. Ce numéro regorge de ressources qui seront à votre goût, qui seront brutes, comme vous avez l'habitude, et, plus encore, les vilains petits secrets.
|
||||||
|
\end{abstract}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\end{titlepage}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\tableofcontents
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\newpage
|
70
FR_fr/essai-debile.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
|
|||||||
|
# La gestion de la pandémie et la numérisation qui en découle.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*La gestion de la pandémie s'est trouvée très accélérée grâce aux outils numériques, ils ont permis une augmentation substancielle des flux numériques et ont augmenté la consommation électrique.*
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## L'accélération de l'outil informatique.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Nonobstant l'utilisation réelle, il a été démontré *largement* que l'utilisation de l'outil informatique a été developpée et s'est accélérée au sein de la population. Plusieurs points semblent accréditer ces affirmations :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* Les ventes de matériel informatique ou de périphériques numériques est en augmentation franche depuis le début de la pandémie,
|
||||||
|
* ordinateurs portables,
|
||||||
|
* imprimantes,
|
||||||
|
* webcams,
|
||||||
|
* tablettes graphiques
|
||||||
|
* La puissance consommée électriquement a augmenté, signe d'un plus grand nombre d'objets connectés simultanément sur le réseau de distribution d'ENEDIS,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il semble évident que cette augmentation permet de supposer une adoption massive de l'usage du numérique dans les années à venir.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## L'opensource ou le logiciel libre ou bien les logiciels licenciés.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La pandémie a aussi permis de réunir autour d'un objectif commun, celui de la réussite de la scolarité des élèves malgré la distanciation physique due au confinement.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
En quelques heures, les personnels enseignants, les parents et les élèves ont dû pour certain sauter dans un train en marche, celui de la numérisation forcée de la société, et pour certains d'entre eux, de l'illectronisme dont ils souffrent.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
En quelques heures, mus par la nécessité et ce désir de converger vers un objectif commun, beaucoup de ``forces vives'' se sont organisées, de façon spontanée, organique, elles pulsent comme un être vivant.
|
||||||
|
<!--
|
||||||
|
\begin{equation}
|
||||||
|
E_C = \dfrac{1}{2} \times m \times v^2
|
||||||
|
\end{equation}
|
||||||
|
-->
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
L'empire Venerström est tel un poulpe vivant qui pulse, il utilise toutes les possibilités offertes par les lois fiscales de Finlande qui permettent l'optimisation fiscale. Ces lois sont à la fois notre orgueil national mais aussi un excellent moyen pour les grands groupes financiers de fuir l'impôt et de contribuer à la vie sociale de ce pays.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Par une série de corruptions et de montages financiers efficaces, cet empire réussit à gagner 250 000 $ à chaque mois, permettant à celles et ceux utilisant ces service de non seulement léser les plus nécessiteux de notre pays, mais aussi de faire fuir du capital par l'achat d'oevres d'arts.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Nombreux sont celles et ceux qui auparavant se sont cassés les dents sur des armées d'avocats aux salaires mirobolants, mais cette fois-ci, *Millenium* a réunit des preuves indiscutables et irréfutables montrant et détaillant le système de corruptions mis en place
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Gérer différents moyens opérationnels
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bla bla bla
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## L'utilisation des outils informatiques pour l'infilstration intrinsèque.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce qui ressort le plus au sein du système de corruption mis en place par le groupe Venerström c'est son côté pyramidal et la solidité de sa structure à tous les étages.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les membres du groupe sont maintenus dans une forme de secret, ne connaissant qu'un membre du niveau supérieur et quelques-uns du niveau inférieur. Une forte solidarité existe au sein de ces groupes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Là où cela change c'est sur les deux derniers niveaux hiérarchiques où tout le monde se connait, mais ces deux niveaux ne regroupent qu'une vingtaine de personnes grand maximum avec à leur tête un *trium-virae* qui dirige le groupe.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Le système de chiffrement 4-3-1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le système utilisé pour protéger les échanges entre membres de la même équipe de l'empire consiste en un chiffrement des contenus avec l'algorythme que nous avons appelé ici `4-3-1`. Cet algorythme consiste à passer 4 passes de chiffrement AES symétrique, puis 3 chiffrement asymétriques et une boucle d'inversion.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Très malin et compliqué à trouver pour des non-spécialistes d'analyse cryptographiques, cet outil a pu être compris grâce à la pugnacité d'une hackeuse de talent que nous nommerons ici *wasp*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Marchandisation des phénomènes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Nous sommes bien évidemment au début de cette transformation numérique, j'abhorre le terme *digital* utilisé par les membres du marketting capable de détruire sa propre famille pour vendre un produit ou gagner une part de marché.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La machandisation des phénomènes est une fois de plus un outil de manipulation étatique dont le but est de maintenir un système pyramidal sociétal où les plus forts écrasent les plus faibles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Nous avons ainsi pu établir que le groupe Venerström utilisait des mécanismes de vente forcée et de rétro-commissions afin d'infiltrer plus de liquidités dans leur montage financier et ainsi pouvoir extraire vers l'étranger des sommes colossales.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Sur la page [wikipedia](https://fr.wikipedia.org/venerström-group) consacrée à l'affaire, il est d'ailleurs précisé :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
>> doigt-nez-yeux fermés
|
||||||
|
>> interconnecté.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Notices légales.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce document a été rédigé en langage **Markdown**, la conversion en *pdf* a été effectuée via le logiciel **pandoc** et quelques options spécifiques. L'ensemble des logiciels utilisés fonctionnait sur un sytème Arch Linux, où qui plus est, le système \LaTeX{} a aussi été déployé.
|
9
FR_fr/guide-rapide-markdown.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
|
|||||||
|
# Pourquoi Markdown
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Markdown, premiers pas
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Markdown : titres et sous-titres
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Markdown : insersion de liens et d'images
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#
|
121
FR_fr/le_markdown.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
|
|||||||
|
# Initiation au langage Markdown
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Introduction
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le langage markdown est un langage de formatage de documents (il n'est donc pas un langage de programmation à proprement parler), c'est un langage de balisage (comme le HTML, le LaTeX, etc..) aux fonctionnalités limitées mais groupant les essentielles pour créer de la documentation formatée en ligne.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pour créer du markdown un simple éditeur de texte brut suffit (le bloc-notes windows suffit donc) même si des outils plus spécialisés ont vu le jour (et plus intuitifs) ce qui sera abordé par la suite.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Le principe
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le principe de ce langage est l'utilisation de caractères comme balise, les logiciels capables d'afficher du markdown interprètent ces balises et formatent la partie du document balisée en conséquence.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Pourquoi ce langage ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce langage
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Où trouve-t-on ce langage ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce langage s'utilise beaucoup dans la communauté des développeurs qui utilisent des systèmes de versionnage de fichiers ou de travaux collaboratifs. Tous les utilisateurs et utilisatrices de « git » l'ont déjà vu s'ils ne le pratiquent pas.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les balisages textuels
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Je range le balisage textuel dans 2 catégories : le formatage textuel et la structure documentale.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Le balisage textuel
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Avant de les traiter je repose ici quelques concepts relatifs à la mise en valeur d'un texte. Le texte est simple comme celui-ci, mais *il peut être en emphase légère comme celui-ci* ou bien **il peut être en emphase forte, comme celui-là**. Par habitude (mauvaise ?) on associe l'emphase légère à l'*italique* et l'emphase forte au **gras**.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pour que les symboles * et _ soient intérprétés comme des balises et non des caractères à afficher naturellement, le symbole doit être collé à la première lettre de la partie à formater et à la dernière lettre. Ainsi `* bonjour *` affiche * bonjour * alors que `*bonjour*` affiche *bonjour*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#### L'emphase légère
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
L'emphase légère se fait en entourant avec * ou avec _ le bloc de texte ou le mot qui doit être mis en valeur. Attention : le symbole doit toucher la première et le symbole la dernière.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ainsi `*bonjour*` et `_bonjour_` donneront *bonjour* et _bonjour_. Vous voyez une différence ? Aucune pas vrai ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La même chose reste valable pour un morceau de phrase ou un paragraphe entier :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
*Ceci est un paragraphe en plusieurs lignes qui sera en emphase légère car l'italique c'est bien mais l'emphase c'est mieux. Pour reprendre les propos de Bourvil je dirais que « l'alcool non, mais l'eau ferrugineuse ... »*
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce qui donne :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*Ceci est un paragraphe en plusieurs lignes qui sera en emphase légère car l'italique c'est bien mais l'emphase c'est mieux. Pour reprendre les propos de Bourvil je dirais que « l'alcool non, mais l'eau ferrugineuse ... »*
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Le balisage de la structure documentale.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Vous aurez remarqué que le document affiche des titres, des sous-titre etc... par des polices de caractères plus grandes et en gras (emphase forte), ces titres sont eux-même balisés grâce au symbole #. Vont suivre un extrait de code et son résultat formaté.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Titre principal (niveau 1)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Sous-titre (niveau 2)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Sous-sous-titre (niveau 3)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#### sous-sous-sous-titre (niveau 4)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce qui donne :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Titre principal (niveau 1)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Sous-titre (niveau 2)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Sous-sous-titre (niveau 3)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#### sous-sous-sous-titre (niveau 4)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
etc. etc.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Le balisage de listes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il existe deux sortes de listes, les listes à puce qui pourront être balisées par les symboles `*` ou `_` et les listes numérotées.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les listes à puce
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Très pratiques et souvent utilisées, les listes à puce sont simplement des lignes de textes qui seront préfixées par `- ` (tiret et espace) ou bien par `* ` (étoile et espace). Ainsi le code suivant :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* ceci est la première ligne de la liste
|
||||||
|
* ceci est la 2nde ligne du code
|
||||||
|
* Voici la 3e
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* ceci est la première ligne de la liste
|
||||||
|
* ceci est la 2nde ligne du code
|
||||||
|
* Voici la 3e
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La même chose s'obtient avec le symbole `-` :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- ceci est la première ligne (bis)
|
||||||
|
- ceci est la seconde ligne de code
|
||||||
|
- et ceci la 3e
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- ceci est la première ligne (bis)
|
||||||
|
- ceci est la seconde ligne de code
|
||||||
|
- et ceci la 3e
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#### Cas des listes imbriquées.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les listes peuvent être imbriquées les unes dans les autres, il suffit alors de tabuler avant le symbole choisi `-` ou `*`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- niveau 1, ligne 1
|
||||||
|
- niveau 1, ligne 2
|
||||||
|
- niveau 1, ligne 3
|
||||||
|
- niveau 2, ligne 1
|
||||||
|
- niveau 2, ligne 2
|
||||||
|
- niveau 3, ligne 3
|
||||||
|
- niveau 1, ligne 4
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les balisages de tableaux
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les balisages de liens
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les balisages d'images
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les balisages de code
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les extensions : le balisage de formules LaTeX
|
6411
FR_fr/manuel-pandoc.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,6411 @@
|
|||||||
|
Pandoc User’s Guide() Pandoc User’s Guide()
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
NNAAMMEE
|
||||||
|
pandoc - general markup converter
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSYYNNOOPPSSIISS
|
||||||
|
pandoc [_o_p_t_i_o_n_s] [_i_n_p_u_t_-_f_i_l_e]...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN
|
||||||
|
Pandoc is a Haskell library for converting from one markup format to
|
||||||
|
another, and a command-line tool that uses this library.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc can convert between numerous markup and word processing formats,
|
||||||
|
including, but not limited to, various flavors of Markdown, HTML, LaTeX
|
||||||
|
and Word docx. For the full lists of input and output formats, see the
|
||||||
|
--from and --to options below. Pandoc can also produce PDF output: see
|
||||||
|
creating a PDF, below.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc’s enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for tables,
|
||||||
|
definition lists, metadata blocks, footnotes, citations, math, and much
|
||||||
|
more. See below under Pandoc’s Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc has a modular design: it consists of a set of readers, which
|
||||||
|
parse text in a given format and produce a native representation of the
|
||||||
|
document (an _a_b_s_t_r_a_c_t _s_y_n_t_a_x _t_r_e_e or AST), and a set of writers, which
|
||||||
|
convert this native representation into a target format. Thus, adding
|
||||||
|
an input or output format requires only adding a reader or writer.
|
||||||
|
Users can also run custom pandoc filters to modify the intermediate
|
||||||
|
AST.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Because pandoc’s intermediate representation of a document is less
|
||||||
|
expressive than many of the formats it converts between, one should not
|
||||||
|
expect perfect conversions between every format and every other.
|
||||||
|
Pandoc attempts to preserve the structural elements of a document, but
|
||||||
|
not formatting details such as margin size. And some document
|
||||||
|
elements, such as complex tables, may not fit into pandoc’s simple
|
||||||
|
document model. While conversions from pandoc’s Markdown to all
|
||||||
|
formats aspire to be perfect, conversions from formats more expressive
|
||||||
|
than pandoc’s Markdown can be expected to be lossy.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
UUssiinngg ppaannddoocc
|
||||||
|
If no _i_n_p_u_t_-_f_i_l_e_s are specified, input is read from _s_t_d_i_n. Output goes
|
||||||
|
to _s_t_d_o_u_t by default. For output to a file, use the -o option:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -o output.html input.txt
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
By default, pandoc produces a document fragment. To produce a
|
||||||
|
standalone document (e.g. a valid HTML file including <head> and
|
||||||
|
<body>), use the -s or --standalone flag:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -s -o output.html input.txt
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For more information on how standalone documents are produced, see
|
||||||
|
Templates below.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If multiple input files are given, pandoc will concatenate them all
|
||||||
|
(with blank lines between them) before parsing. (Use --file-scope to
|
||||||
|
parse files individually.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSppeecciiffyyiinngg ffoorrmmaattss
|
||||||
|
The format of the input and output can be specified explicitly using
|
||||||
|
command-line options. The input format can be specified using the
|
||||||
|
-f/--from option, the output format using the -t/--to option. Thus, to
|
||||||
|
convert hello.txt from Markdown to LaTeX, you could type:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -f markdown -t latex hello.txt
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To convert hello.html from HTML to Markdown:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -f html -t markdown hello.html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Supported input and output formats are listed below under Options (see
|
||||||
|
-f for input formats and -t for output formats). You can also use
|
||||||
|
pandoc --list-input-formats and pandoc --list-output-formats to print
|
||||||
|
lists of supported formats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the input or output format is not specified explicitly, pandoc will
|
||||||
|
attempt to guess it from the extensions of the filenames. Thus, for
|
||||||
|
example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -o hello.tex hello.txt
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
will convert hello.txt from Markdown to LaTeX. If no output file is
|
||||||
|
specified (so that output goes to _s_t_d_o_u_t), or if the output file’s
|
||||||
|
extension is unknown, the output format will default to HTML. If no
|
||||||
|
input file is specified (so that input comes from _s_t_d_i_n), or if the
|
||||||
|
input files’ extensions are unknown, the input format will be assumed
|
||||||
|
to be Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CChhaarraacctteerr eennccooddiinngg
|
||||||
|
Pandoc uses the UTF-8 character encoding for both input and output. If
|
||||||
|
your local character encoding is not UTF-8, you should pipe input and
|
||||||
|
output through iconv:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iconv -t utf-8 input.txt | pandoc | iconv -f utf-8
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that in some output formats (such as HTML, LaTeX, ConTeXt, RTF,
|
||||||
|
OPML, DocBook, and Texinfo), information about the character encoding
|
||||||
|
is included in the document header, which will only be included if you
|
||||||
|
use the -s/--standalone option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCrreeaattiinngg aa PPDDFF
|
||||||
|
To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a .pdf extension:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc test.txt -o test.pdf
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to create the PDF, which requires
|
||||||
|
that a LaTeX engine be installed (see --pdf-engine below).
|
||||||
|
Alternatively, pandoc can use ConTeXt, roff ms, or HTML as an
|
||||||
|
intermediate format. To do this, specify an output file with a .pdf
|
||||||
|
extension, as before, but add the --pdf-engine option or -t context, -t
|
||||||
|
html, or -t ms to the command line. The tool used to generate the PDF
|
||||||
|
from the intermediate format may be specified using --pdf-engine.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
You can control the PDF style using variables, depending on the
|
||||||
|
intermediate format used: see variables for LaTeX, variables for
|
||||||
|
ConTeXt, variables for wkhtmltopdf, variables for ms. When HTML is
|
||||||
|
used as an intermediate format, the output can be styled using --css.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To debug the PDF creation, it can be useful to look at the intermediate
|
||||||
|
representation: instead of -o test.pdf, use for example -s -o test.tex
|
||||||
|
to output the generated LaTeX. You can then test it with pdflatex
|
||||||
|
test.tex.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When using LaTeX, the following packages need to be available (they are
|
||||||
|
included with all recent versions of TeX Live): amsfonts, amsmath, lm,
|
||||||
|
unicode-math, iftex, listings (if the --listings option is used),
|
||||||
|
fancyvrb, longtable, booktabs, graphicx (if the document contains
|
||||||
|
images), hyperref, xcolor, ulem, geometry (with the geometry variable
|
||||||
|
set), setspace (with linestretch), and babel (with lang). The use of
|
||||||
|
xelatex or lualatex as the PDF engine requires fontspec. lualatex uses
|
||||||
|
selnolig. xelatex uses polyglossia (with lang), xecjk, and bidi (with
|
||||||
|
the dir variable set). If the mathspec variable is set, xelatex will
|
||||||
|
use mathspec instead of unicode-math. The upquote and microtype
|
||||||
|
packages are used if available, and csquotes will be used for
|
||||||
|
typography if the csquotes variable or metadata field is set to a true
|
||||||
|
value. The natbib, biblatex, bibtex, and biber packages can optionally
|
||||||
|
be used for citation rendering. The following packages will be used to
|
||||||
|
improve output quality if present, but pandoc does not require them to
|
||||||
|
be present: upquote (for straight quotes in verbatim environments),
|
||||||
|
microtype (for better spacing adjustments), parskip (for better inter-
|
||||||
|
paragraph spaces), xurl (for better line breaks in URLs), bookmark (for
|
||||||
|
better PDF bookmarks), and footnotehyper or footnote (to allow
|
||||||
|
footnotes in tables).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RReeaaddiinngg ffrroomm tthhee WWeebb
|
||||||
|
Instead of an input file, an absolute URI may be given. In this case
|
||||||
|
pandoc will fetch the content using HTTP:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -f html -t markdown https://www.fsf.org
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
It is possible to supply a custom User-Agent string or other header
|
||||||
|
when requesting a document from a URL:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -f html -t markdown --request-header User-Agent:"Mozilla/5.0" \
|
||||||
|
https://www.fsf.org
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOPPTTIIOONNSS
|
||||||
|
GGeenneerraall ooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
--ff _F_O_R_M_A_T, --rr _F_O_R_M_A_T, ----ffrroomm==_F_O_R_M_A_T, ----rreeaadd==_F_O_R_M_A_T
|
||||||
|
Specify input format. _F_O_R_M_A_T can be:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• bibtex (BibTeX bibliography)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• biblatex (BibLaTeX bibliography)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• commonmark (CommonMark Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• commonmark_x (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• creole (Creole 1.0)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• csljson (CSL JSON bibliography)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• csv (CSV table)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• docbook (DocBook)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• docx (Word docx)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• dokuwiki (DokuWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• epub (EPUB)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• fb2 (FictionBook2 e-book)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• gfm (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
|
||||||
|
accurate markdown_github; use markdown_github only if you need
|
||||||
|
extensions not supported in gfm.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• haddock (Haddock markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• html (HTML)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• ipynb (Jupyter notebook)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jats (JATS XML)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jira (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• json (JSON version of native AST)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• latex (LaTeX)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown (Pandoc’s Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_mmd (MultiMarkdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_phpextra (PHP Markdown Extra)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_strict (original unextended Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• mediawiki (MediaWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• man (roff man)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• muse (Muse)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• native (native Haskell)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• odt (ODT)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• opml (OPML)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• org (Emacs Org mode)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• rst (reStructuredText)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• t2t (txt2tags)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• textile (Textile)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• tikiwiki (TikiWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• twiki (TWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• vimwiki (Vimwiki)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by appending
|
||||||
|
+EXTENSION or -EXTENSION to the format name. See Extensions
|
||||||
|
below, for a list of extensions and their names. See
|
||||||
|
--list-input-formats and --list-extensions, below.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--tt _F_O_R_M_A_T, --ww _F_O_R_M_A_T, ----ttoo==_F_O_R_M_A_T, ----wwrriittee==_F_O_R_M_A_T
|
||||||
|
Specify output format. _F_O_R_M_A_T can be:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• asciidoc (AsciiDoc) or asciidoctor (AsciiDoctor)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• beamer (LaTeX beamer slide show)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• bibtex (BibTeX bibliography)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• biblatex (BibLaTeX bibliography)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• commonmark (CommonMark Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• commonmark_x (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• context (ConTeXt)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• csljson (CSL JSON bibliography)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• docbook or docbook4 (DocBook 4)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• docbook5 (DocBook 5)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• docx (Word docx)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• dokuwiki (DokuWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• epub or epub3 (EPUB v3 book)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• epub2 (EPUB v2)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• fb2 (FictionBook2 e-book)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• gfm (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
|
||||||
|
accurate markdown_github; use markdown_github only if you need
|
||||||
|
extensions not supported in gfm.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• haddock (Haddock markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• html or html5 (HTML, i.e. HTML5/XHTML polyglot markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• html4 (XHTML 1.0 Transitional)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• icml (InDesign ICML)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• ipynb (Jupyter notebook)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jats_archiving (JATS XML, Archiving and Interchange Tag Set)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jats_articleauthoring (JATS XML, Article Authoring Tag Set)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jats_publishing (JATS XML, Journal Publishing Tag Set)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jats (alias for jats_archiving)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• jira (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• json (JSON version of native AST)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• latex (LaTeX)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• man (roff man)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown (Pandoc’s Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_mmd (MultiMarkdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_phpextra (PHP Markdown Extra)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_strict (original unextended Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• mediawiki (MediaWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• ms (roff ms)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• muse (Muse),
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• native (native Haskell),
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• odt (OpenOffice text document)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• opml (OPML)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• opendocument (OpenDocument)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• org (Emacs Org mode)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• pdf (PDF)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• plain (plain text),
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• pptx (PowerPoint slide show)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• rst (reStructuredText)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• rtf (Rich Text Format)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• texinfo (GNU Texinfo)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• textile (Textile)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• slideous (Slideous HTML and JavaScript slide show)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• slidy (Slidy HTML and JavaScript slide show)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• dzslides (DZSlides HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• revealjs (reveal.js HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• s5 (S5 HTML and JavaScript slide show)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• tei (TEI Simple)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• xwiki (XWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• zimwiki (ZimWiki markup)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• the path of a custom Lua writer, see Custom writers below
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that odt, docx, epub, and pdf output will not be directed
|
||||||
|
to _s_t_d_o_u_t unless forced with -o -.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by appending
|
||||||
|
+EXTENSION or -EXTENSION to the format name. See Extensions
|
||||||
|
below, for a list of extensions and their names. See
|
||||||
|
--list-output-formats and --list-extensions, below.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--oo _F_I_L_E, ----oouuttppuutt==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Write output to _F_I_L_E instead of _s_t_d_o_u_t. If _F_I_L_E is -, output
|
||||||
|
will go to _s_t_d_o_u_t, even if a non-textual format (docx, odt,
|
||||||
|
epub2, epub3) is specified.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ddaattaa--ddiirr==_D_I_R_E_C_T_O_R_Y
|
||||||
|
Specify the user data directory to search for pandoc data files.
|
||||||
|
If this option is not specified, the default user data directory
|
||||||
|
will be used. On *nix and macOS systems this will be the pandoc
|
||||||
|
subdirectory of the XDG data directory (by default,
|
||||||
|
$HOME/.local/share, overridable by setting the XDG_DATA_HOME
|
||||||
|
environment variable). If that directory does not exist and
|
||||||
|
$HOME/.pandoc exists, it will be used (for backwards
|
||||||
|
compatibility). On Windows the default user data directory is
|
||||||
|
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\pandoc. You can find the
|
||||||
|
default user data directory on your system by looking at the
|
||||||
|
output of pandoc --version. Data files placed in this directory
|
||||||
|
(for example, reference.odt, reference.docx, epub.css,
|
||||||
|
templates) will override pandoc’s normal defaults.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--dd _F_I_L_E, ----ddeeffaauullttss==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Specify a set of default option settings. _F_I_L_E is a YAML file
|
||||||
|
whose fields correspond to command-line option settings. All
|
||||||
|
options for document conversion, including input and output
|
||||||
|
files, can be set using a defaults file. The file will be
|
||||||
|
searched for first in the working directory, and then in the
|
||||||
|
defaults subdirectory of the user data directory (see
|
||||||
|
--data-dir). The .yaml extension may be omitted. See the
|
||||||
|
section Default files for more information on the file format.
|
||||||
|
Settings from the defaults file may be overridden or extended by
|
||||||
|
subsequent options on the command line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----bbaasshh--ccoommpplleettiioonn
|
||||||
|
Generate a bash completion script. To enable bash completion
|
||||||
|
with pandoc, add this to your .bashrc:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
eval "$(pandoc --bash-completion)"
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----vveerrbboossee
|
||||||
|
Give verbose debugging output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----qquuiieett
|
||||||
|
Suppress warning messages.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ffaaiill--iiff--wwaarrnniinnggss
|
||||||
|
Exit with error status if there are any warnings.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lloogg==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Write log messages in machine-readable JSON format to _F_I_L_E. All
|
||||||
|
messages above DEBUG level will be written, regardless of
|
||||||
|
verbosity settings (--verbose, --quiet).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lliisstt--iinnppuutt--ffoorrmmaattss
|
||||||
|
List supported input formats, one per line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lliisstt--oouuttppuutt--ffoorrmmaattss
|
||||||
|
List supported output formats, one per line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lliisstt--eexxtteennssiioonnss[==_F_O_R_M_A_T]
|
||||||
|
List supported extensions for _F_O_R_M_A_T, one per line, preceded by
|
||||||
|
a + or - indicating whether it is enabled by default in _F_O_R_M_A_T.
|
||||||
|
If _F_O_R_M_A_T is not specified, defaults for pandoc’s Markdown are
|
||||||
|
given.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lliisstt--hhiigghhlliigghhtt--llaanngguuaaggeess
|
||||||
|
List supported languages for syntax highlighting, one per line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lliisstt--hhiigghhlliigghhtt--ssttyylleess
|
||||||
|
List supported styles for syntax highlighting, one per line.
|
||||||
|
See --highlight-style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--vv, ----vveerrssiioonn
|
||||||
|
Print version.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--hh, ----hheellpp
|
||||||
|
Show usage message.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RReeaaddeerr ooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
----sshhiifftt--hheeaaddiinngg--lleevveell--bbyy==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Shift heading levels by a positive or negative integer. For
|
||||||
|
example, with --shift-heading-level-by=-1, level 2 headings
|
||||||
|
become level 1 headings, and level 3 headings become level 2
|
||||||
|
headings. Headings cannot have a level less than 1, so a
|
||||||
|
heading that would be shifted below level 1 becomes a regular
|
||||||
|
paragraph. Exception: with a shift of -N, a level-N heading at
|
||||||
|
the beginning of the document replaces the metadata title.
|
||||||
|
--shift-heading-level-by=-1 is a good choice when converting
|
||||||
|
HTML or Markdown documents that use an initial level-1 heading
|
||||||
|
for the document title and level-2+ headings for sections.
|
||||||
|
--shift-heading-level-by=1 may be a good choice for converting
|
||||||
|
Markdown documents that use level-1 headings for sections to
|
||||||
|
HTML, since pandoc uses a level-1 heading to render the document
|
||||||
|
title.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----bbaassee--hheeaaddeerr--lleevveell==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
_D_e_p_r_e_c_a_t_e_d_. _U_s_e _-_-_s_h_i_f_t_-_h_e_a_d_i_n_g_-_l_e_v_e_l_-_b_y_=_X _i_n_s_t_e_a_d_, _w_h_e_r_e _X _=
|
||||||
|
_N_U_M_B_E_R _- _1_. Specify the base level for headings (defaults to 1).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ssttrriipp--eemmppttyy--ppaarraaggrraapphhss
|
||||||
|
_D_e_p_r_e_c_a_t_e_d_. _U_s_e _t_h_e _+_e_m_p_t_y___p_a_r_a_g_r_a_p_h_s _e_x_t_e_n_s_i_o_n _i_n_s_t_e_a_d_. Ignore
|
||||||
|
paragraphs with no content. This option is useful for
|
||||||
|
converting word processing documents where users have used empty
|
||||||
|
paragraphs to create inter-paragraph space.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----iinnddeenntteedd--ccooddee--ccllaasssseess==_C_L_A_S_S_E_S
|
||||||
|
Specify classes to use for indented code blocks–for example,
|
||||||
|
perl,numberLines or haskell. Multiple classes may be separated
|
||||||
|
by spaces or commas.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ddeeffaauulltt--iimmaaggee--eexxtteennssiioonn==_E_X_T_E_N_S_I_O_N
|
||||||
|
Specify a default extension to use when image paths/URLs have no
|
||||||
|
extension. This allows you to use the same source for formats
|
||||||
|
that require different kinds of images. Currently this option
|
||||||
|
only affects the Markdown and LaTeX readers.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ffiillee--ssccooppee
|
||||||
|
Parse each file individually before combining for multifile
|
||||||
|
documents. This will allow footnotes in different files with
|
||||||
|
the same identifiers to work as expected. If this option is
|
||||||
|
set, footnotes and links will not work across files. Reading
|
||||||
|
binary files (docx, odt, epub) implies --file-scope.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--FF _P_R_O_G_R_A_M, ----ffiilltteerr==_P_R_O_G_R_A_M
|
||||||
|
Specify an executable to be used as a filter transforming the
|
||||||
|
pandoc AST after the input is parsed and before the output is
|
||||||
|
written. The executable should read JSON from stdin and write
|
||||||
|
JSON to stdout. The JSON must be formatted like pandoc’s own
|
||||||
|
JSON input and output. The name of the output format will be
|
||||||
|
passed to the filter as the first argument. Hence,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --filter ./caps.py -t latex
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
is equivalent to
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -t json | ./caps.py latex | pandoc -f json -t latex
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The latter form may be useful for debugging filters.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Filters may be written in any language. Text.Pandoc.JSON
|
||||||
|
exports toJSONFilter to facilitate writing filters in Haskell.
|
||||||
|
Those who would prefer to write filters in python can use the
|
||||||
|
module pandocfilters, installable from PyPI. There are also
|
||||||
|
pandoc filter libraries in PHP, perl, and JavaScript/node.js.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In order of preference, pandoc will look for filters in
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. a specified full or relative path (executable or non-
|
||||||
|
executable)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
2. $DATADIR/filters (executable or non-executable) where
|
||||||
|
$DATADIR is the user data directory (see --data-dir, above).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
3. $PATH (executable only)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Filters, Lua-filters, and citeproc processing are applied in the
|
||||||
|
order specified on the command line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--LL _S_C_R_I_P_T, ----lluuaa--ffiilltteerr==_S_C_R_I_P_T
|
||||||
|
Transform the document in a similar fashion as JSON filters (see
|
||||||
|
--filter), but use pandoc’s built-in Lua filtering system. The
|
||||||
|
given Lua script is expected to return a list of Lua filters
|
||||||
|
which will be applied in order. Each Lua filter must contain
|
||||||
|
element-transforming functions indexed by the name of the AST
|
||||||
|
element on which the filter function should be applied.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The pandoc Lua module provides helper functions for element
|
||||||
|
creation. It is always loaded into the script’s Lua
|
||||||
|
environment.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the Lua filters documentation for further details.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In order of preference, pandoc will look for Lua filters in
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. a specified full or relative path
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
2. $DATADIR/filters where $DATADIR is the user data directory
|
||||||
|
(see --data-dir, above).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Filters, Lua filters, and citeproc processing are applied in the
|
||||||
|
order specified on the command line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--MM _K_E_Y[==_V_A_L], ----mmeettaaddaattaa==_K_E_Y[::_V_A_L]
|
||||||
|
Set the metadata field _K_E_Y to the value _V_A_L. A value specified
|
||||||
|
on the command line overrides a value specified in the document
|
||||||
|
using YAML metadata blocks. Values will be parsed as YAML
|
||||||
|
boolean or string values. If no value is specified, the value
|
||||||
|
will be treated as Boolean true. Like --variable, --metadata
|
||||||
|
causes template variables to be set. But unlike --variable,
|
||||||
|
--metadata affects the metadata of the underlying document
|
||||||
|
(which is accessible from filters and may be printed in some
|
||||||
|
output formats) and metadata values will be escaped when
|
||||||
|
inserted into the template.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----mmeettaaddaattaa--ffiillee==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Read metadata from the supplied YAML (or JSON) file. This
|
||||||
|
option can be used with every input format, but string scalars
|
||||||
|
in the YAML file will always be parsed as Markdown. Generally,
|
||||||
|
the input will be handled the same as in YAML metadata blocks.
|
||||||
|
This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple metadata
|
||||||
|
files; values in files specified later on the command line will
|
||||||
|
be preferred over those specified in earlier files. Metadata
|
||||||
|
values specified inside the document, or by using -M, overwrite
|
||||||
|
values specified with this option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--pp, ----pprreesseerrvvee--ttaabbss
|
||||||
|
Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces. (By
|
||||||
|
default, pandoc converts tabs to spaces before parsing its
|
||||||
|
input.) Note that this will only affect tabs in literal code
|
||||||
|
spans and code blocks. Tabs in regular text are always treated
|
||||||
|
as spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ttaabb--ssttoopp==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Specify the number of spaces per tab (default is 4).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ttrraacckk--cchhaannggeess==aacccceepptt|rreejjeecctt|aallll
|
||||||
|
Specifies what to do with insertions, deletions, and comments
|
||||||
|
produced by the MS Word “Track Changes” feature. accept (the
|
||||||
|
default) processes all the insertions and deletions. reject
|
||||||
|
ignores them. Both accept and reject ignore comments. all
|
||||||
|
includes all insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped in
|
||||||
|
spans with insertion, deletion, comment-start, and comment-end
|
||||||
|
classes, respectively. The author and time of change is
|
||||||
|
included. all is useful for scripting: only accepting changes
|
||||||
|
from a certain reviewer, say, or before a certain date. If a
|
||||||
|
paragraph is inserted or deleted, track-changes=all produces a
|
||||||
|
span with the class paragraph-insertion/paragraph-deletion
|
||||||
|
before the affected paragraph break. This option only affects
|
||||||
|
the docx reader.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eexxttrraacctt--mmeeddiiaa==_D_I_R
|
||||||
|
Extract images and other media contained in or linked from the
|
||||||
|
source document to the path _D_I_R, creating it if necessary, and
|
||||||
|
adjust the images references in the document so they point to
|
||||||
|
the extracted files. Media are downloaded, read from the file
|
||||||
|
system, or extracted from a binary container (e.g. docx), as
|
||||||
|
needed. The original file paths are used if they are relative
|
||||||
|
paths not containing ... Otherwise filenames are constructed
|
||||||
|
from the SHA1 hash of the contents.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----aabbbbrreevviiaattiioonnss==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Specifies a custom abbreviations file, with abbreviations one to
|
||||||
|
a line. If this option is not specified, pandoc will read the
|
||||||
|
data file abbreviations from the user data directory or fall
|
||||||
|
back on a system default. To see the system default, use pandoc
|
||||||
|
--print-default-data-file=abbreviations. The only use pandoc
|
||||||
|
makes of this list is in the Markdown reader. Strings found in
|
||||||
|
this list will be followed by a nonbreaking space, and the
|
||||||
|
period will not produce sentence-ending space in formats like
|
||||||
|
LaTeX. The strings may not contain spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
GGeenneerraall wwrriitteerr ooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
--ss, ----ssttaannddaalloonnee
|
||||||
|
Produce output with an appropriate header and footer (e.g. a
|
||||||
|
standalone HTML, LaTeX, TEI, or RTF file, not a fragment). This
|
||||||
|
option is set automatically for pdf, epub, epub3, fb2, docx, and
|
||||||
|
odt output. For native output, this option causes metadata to
|
||||||
|
be included; otherwise, metadata is suppressed.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----tteemmppllaattee==_F_I_L_E|_U_R_L
|
||||||
|
Use the specified file as a custom template for the generated
|
||||||
|
document. Implies --standalone. See Templates, below, for a
|
||||||
|
description of template syntax. If no extension is specified,
|
||||||
|
an extension corresponding to the writer will be added, so that
|
||||||
|
--template=special looks for special.html for HTML output. If
|
||||||
|
the template is not found, pandoc will search for it in the
|
||||||
|
templates subdirectory of the user data directory (see
|
||||||
|
--data-dir). If this option is not used, a default template
|
||||||
|
appropriate for the output format will be used (see
|
||||||
|
-D/--print-default-template).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--VV _K_E_Y[==_V_A_L], ----vvaarriiaabbllee==_K_E_Y[::_V_A_L]
|
||||||
|
Set the template variable _K_E_Y to the value _V_A_L when rendering
|
||||||
|
the document in standalone mode. If no _V_A_L is specified, the
|
||||||
|
key will be given the value true.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--DD _F_O_R_M_A_T, ----pprriinntt--ddeeffaauulltt--tteemmppllaattee==_F_O_R_M_A_T
|
||||||
|
Print the system default template for an output _F_O_R_M_A_T. (See -t
|
||||||
|
for a list of possible _F_O_R_M_A_Ts.) Templates in the user data
|
||||||
|
directory are ignored. This option may be used with -o/--output
|
||||||
|
to redirect output to a file, but -o/--output must come before
|
||||||
|
--print-default-template on the command line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that some of the default templates use partials, for
|
||||||
|
example styles.html. To print the partials, use
|
||||||
|
--print-default-data-file: for example,
|
||||||
|
--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----pprriinntt--ddeeffaauulltt--ddaattaa--ffiillee==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Print a system default data file. Files in the user data
|
||||||
|
directory are ignored. This option may be used with -o/--output
|
||||||
|
to redirect output to a file, but -o/--output must come before
|
||||||
|
--print-default-data-file on the command line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eeooll==ccrrllff|llff|nnaattiivvee
|
||||||
|
Manually specify line endings: crlf (Windows), lf
|
||||||
|
(macOS/Linux/UNIX), or native (line endings appropriate to the
|
||||||
|
OS on which pandoc is being run). The default is native.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ddppii=_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Specify the default dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion
|
||||||
|
from pixels to inch/centimeters and vice versa. (Technically,
|
||||||
|
the correct term would be ppi: pixels per inch.) The default is
|
||||||
|
96dpi. When images contain information about dpi internally,
|
||||||
|
the encoded value is used instead of the default specified by
|
||||||
|
this option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----wwrraapp==aauuttoo|nnoonnee|pprreesseerrvvee
|
||||||
|
Determine how text is wrapped in the output (the source code,
|
||||||
|
not the rendered version). With auto (the default), pandoc will
|
||||||
|
attempt to wrap lines to the column width specified by --columns
|
||||||
|
(default 72). With none, pandoc will not wrap lines at all.
|
||||||
|
With preserve, pandoc will attempt to preserve the wrapping from
|
||||||
|
the source document (that is, where there are nonsemantic
|
||||||
|
newlines in the source, there will be nonsemantic newlines in
|
||||||
|
the output as well). Automatic wrapping does not currently work
|
||||||
|
in HTML output. In ipynb output, this option affects wrapping
|
||||||
|
of the contents of markdown cells.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ccoolluummnnss==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Specify length of lines in characters. This affects text
|
||||||
|
wrapping in the generated source code (see --wrap). It also
|
||||||
|
affects calculation of column widths for plain text tables (see
|
||||||
|
Tables below).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ttoocc, ----ttaabbllee--ooff--ccoonntteennttss
|
||||||
|
Include an automatically generated table of contents (or, in the
|
||||||
|
case of latex, context, docx, odt, opendocument, rst, or ms, an
|
||||||
|
instruction to create one) in the output document. This option
|
||||||
|
has no effect unless -s/--standalone is used, and it has no
|
||||||
|
effect on man, docbook4, docbook5, or jats output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that if you are producing a PDF via ms, the table of
|
||||||
|
contents will appear at the beginning of the document, before
|
||||||
|
the title. If you would prefer it to be at the end of the
|
||||||
|
document, use the option --pdf-engine-opt=--no-toc-relocation.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ttoocc--ddeepptthh==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Specify the number of section levels to include in the table of
|
||||||
|
contents. The default is 3 (which means that level-1, 2, and 3
|
||||||
|
headings will be listed in the contents).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ssttrriipp--ccoommmmeennttss
|
||||||
|
Strip out HTML comments in the Markdown or Textile source,
|
||||||
|
rather than passing them on to Markdown, Textile or HTML output
|
||||||
|
as raw HTML. This does not apply to HTML comments inside raw
|
||||||
|
HTML blocks when the markdown_in_html_blocks extension is not
|
||||||
|
set.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----nnoo--hhiigghhlliigghhtt
|
||||||
|
Disables syntax highlighting for code blocks and inlines, even
|
||||||
|
when a language attribute is given.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----hhiigghhlliigghhtt--ssttyyllee==_S_T_Y_L_E|_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Specifies the coloring style to be used in highlighted source
|
||||||
|
code. Options are pygments (the default), kate, monochrome,
|
||||||
|
breezeDark, espresso, zenburn, haddock, and tango. For more
|
||||||
|
information on syntax highlighting in pandoc, see Syntax
|
||||||
|
highlighting, below. See also --list-highlight-styles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Instead of a _S_T_Y_L_E name, a JSON file with extension .theme may
|
||||||
|
be supplied. This will be parsed as a KDE syntax highlighting
|
||||||
|
theme and (if valid) used as the highlighting style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To generate the JSON version of an existing style, use
|
||||||
|
--print-highlight-style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----pprriinntt--hhiigghhlliigghhtt--ssttyyllee==_S_T_Y_L_E|_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Prints a JSON version of a highlighting style, which can be
|
||||||
|
modified, saved with a .theme extension, and used with
|
||||||
|
--highlight-style. This option may be used with -o/--output to
|
||||||
|
redirect output to a file, but -o/--output must come before
|
||||||
|
--print-highlight-style on the command line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ssyynnttaaxx--ddeeffiinniittiioonn==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Instructs pandoc to load a KDE XML syntax definition file, which
|
||||||
|
will be used for syntax highlighting of appropriately marked
|
||||||
|
code blocks. This can be used to add support for new languages
|
||||||
|
or to use altered syntax definitions for existing languages.
|
||||||
|
This option may be repeated to add multiple syntax definitions.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--HH _F_I_L_E, ----iinncclluuddee--iinn--hheeaaddeerr==_F_I_L_E|_U_R_L
|
||||||
|
Include contents of _F_I_L_E, verbatim, at the end of the header.
|
||||||
|
This can be used, for example, to include special CSS or
|
||||||
|
JavaScript in HTML documents. This option can be used
|
||||||
|
repeatedly to include multiple files in the header. They will
|
||||||
|
be included in the order specified. Implies --standalone.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--BB _F_I_L_E, ----iinncclluuddee--bbeeffoorree--bbooddyy==_F_I_L_E|_U_R_L
|
||||||
|
Include contents of _F_I_L_E, verbatim, at the beginning of the
|
||||||
|
document body (e.g. after the <body> tag in HTML, or the
|
||||||
|
\begin{document} command in LaTeX). This can be used to include
|
||||||
|
navigation bars or banners in HTML documents. This option can
|
||||||
|
be used repeatedly to include multiple files. They will be
|
||||||
|
included in the order specified. Implies --standalone.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--AA _F_I_L_E, ----iinncclluuddee--aafftteerr--bbooddyy==_F_I_L_E|_U_R_L
|
||||||
|
Include contents of _F_I_L_E, verbatim, at the end of the document
|
||||||
|
body (before the </body> tag in HTML, or the \end{document}
|
||||||
|
command in LaTeX). This option can be used repeatedly to
|
||||||
|
include multiple files. They will be included in the order
|
||||||
|
specified. Implies --standalone.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----rreessoouurrccee--ppaatthh==_S_E_A_R_C_H_P_A_T_H
|
||||||
|
List of paths to search for images and other resources. The
|
||||||
|
paths should be separated by : on Linux, UNIX, and macOS
|
||||||
|
systems, and by ; on Windows. If --resource-path is not
|
||||||
|
specified, the default resource path is the working directory.
|
||||||
|
Note that, if --resource-path is specified, the working
|
||||||
|
directory must be explicitly listed or it will not be searched.
|
||||||
|
For example: --resource-path=.:test will search the working
|
||||||
|
directory and the test subdirectory, in that order. This option
|
||||||
|
can be used repeatedly. Search path components that come later
|
||||||
|
on the command line will be searched before those that come
|
||||||
|
earlier, so --resource-path foo:bar --resource-path baz:bim is
|
||||||
|
equivalent to --resource-path baz:bim:foo:bar.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----rreeqquueesstt--hheeaaddeerr==_N_A_M_E::_V_A_L
|
||||||
|
Set the request header _N_A_M_E to the value _V_A_L when making HTTP
|
||||||
|
requests (for example, when a URL is given on the command line,
|
||||||
|
or when resources used in a document must be downloaded). If
|
||||||
|
you’re behind a proxy, you also need to set the environment
|
||||||
|
variable http_proxy to http://....
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----nnoo--cchheecckk--cceerrttiiffiiccaattee
|
||||||
|
Disable the certificate verification to allow access to unsecure
|
||||||
|
HTTP resources (for example when the certificate is no longer
|
||||||
|
valid or self signed).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOppttiioonnss aaffffeeccttiinngg ssppeecciiffiicc wwrriitteerrss
|
||||||
|
----sseellff--ccoonnttaaiinneedd
|
||||||
|
Produce a standalone HTML file with no external dependencies,
|
||||||
|
using data: URIs to incorporate the contents of linked scripts,
|
||||||
|
stylesheets, images, and videos. Implies --standalone. The
|
||||||
|
resulting file should be “self-contained,” in the sense that it
|
||||||
|
needs no external files and no net access to be displayed
|
||||||
|
properly by a browser. This option works only with HTML output
|
||||||
|
formats, including html4, html5, html+lhs, html5+lhs, s5, slidy,
|
||||||
|
slideous, dzslides, and revealjs. Scripts, images, and
|
||||||
|
stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded; those at
|
||||||
|
relative URLs will be sought relative to the working directory
|
||||||
|
(if the first source file is local) or relative to the base URL
|
||||||
|
(if the first source file is remote). Elements with the
|
||||||
|
attribute data-external="1" will be left alone; the documents
|
||||||
|
they link to will not be incorporated in the document.
|
||||||
|
Limitation: resources that are loaded dynamically through
|
||||||
|
JavaScript cannot be incorporated; as a result, --self-contained
|
||||||
|
does not work with --mathjax, and some advanced features
|
||||||
|
(e.g. zoom or speaker notes) may not work in an offline “self-
|
||||||
|
contained” reveal.js slide show.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----hhttmmll--qq--ttaaggss
|
||||||
|
Use <q> tags for quotes in HTML. (This option only has an
|
||||||
|
effect if the smart extension is enabled for the input format
|
||||||
|
used.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----aasscciiii
|
||||||
|
Use only ASCII characters in output. Currently supported for
|
||||||
|
XML and HTML formats (which use entities instead of UTF-8 when
|
||||||
|
this option is selected), CommonMark, gfm, and Markdown (which
|
||||||
|
use entities), roff ms (which use hexadecimal escapes), and to a
|
||||||
|
limited degree LaTeX (which uses standard commands for accented
|
||||||
|
characters when possible). roff man output uses ASCII by
|
||||||
|
default.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----rreeffeerreennccee--lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
Use reference-style links, rather than inline links, in writing
|
||||||
|
Markdown or reStructuredText. By default inline links are used.
|
||||||
|
The placement of link references is affected by the
|
||||||
|
--reference-location option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----rreeffeerreennccee--llooccaattiioonn==bblloocckk|sseeccttiioonn|ddooccuummeenntt
|
||||||
|
Specify whether footnotes (and references, if reference-links is
|
||||||
|
set) are placed at the end of the current (top-level) block, the
|
||||||
|
current section, or the document. The default is document.
|
||||||
|
Currently only affects the markdown writer.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----mmaarrkkddoowwnn--hheeaaddiinnggss==sseetteexxtt|aattxx
|
||||||
|
Specify whether to use ATX-style (#-prefixed) or Setext-style
|
||||||
|
(underlined) headings for level 1 and 2 headings in Markdown
|
||||||
|
output. (The default is atx.) ATX-style headings are always
|
||||||
|
used for levels 3+. This option also affects Markdown cells in
|
||||||
|
ipynb output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----aattxx--hheeaaddeerrss
|
||||||
|
_D_e_p_r_e_c_a_t_e_d _s_y_n_o_n_y_m _f_o_r _-_-_m_a_r_k_d_o_w_n_-_h_e_a_d_i_n_g_s_=_a_t_x_.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ttoopp--lleevveell--ddiivviissiioonn==ddeeffaauulltt|sseeccttiioonn|cchhaapptteerr|ppaarrtt
|
||||||
|
Treat top-level headings as the given division type in LaTeX,
|
||||||
|
ConTeXt, DocBook, and TEI output. The hierarchy order is part,
|
||||||
|
chapter, then section; all headings are shifted such that the
|
||||||
|
top-level heading becomes the specified type. The default
|
||||||
|
behavior is to determine the best division type via heuristics:
|
||||||
|
unless other conditions apply, section is chosen. When the
|
||||||
|
documentclass variable is set to report, book, or memoir (unless
|
||||||
|
the article option is specified), chapter is implied as the
|
||||||
|
setting for this option. If beamer is the output format,
|
||||||
|
specifying either chapter or part will cause top-level headings
|
||||||
|
to become \part{..}, while second-level headings remain as their
|
||||||
|
default type.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--NN, ----nnuummbbeerr--sseeccttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, Docx, ms, or
|
||||||
|
EPUB output. By default, sections are not numbered. Sections
|
||||||
|
with class unnumbered will never be numbered, even if
|
||||||
|
--number-sections is specified.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----nnuummbbeerr--ooffffsseett==_N_U_M_B_E_R[,,_N_U_M_B_E_R,,_._._.]
|
||||||
|
Offset for section headings in HTML output (ignored in other
|
||||||
|
output formats). The first number is added to the section
|
||||||
|
number for top-level headings, the second for second-level
|
||||||
|
headings, and so on. So, for example, if you want the first
|
||||||
|
top-level heading in your document to be numbered “6”, specify
|
||||||
|
--number-offset=5. If your document starts with a level-2
|
||||||
|
heading which you want to be numbered “1.5”, specify
|
||||||
|
--number-offset=1,4. Offsets are 0 by default. Implies
|
||||||
|
--number-sections.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----lliissttiinnggss
|
||||||
|
Use the listings package for LaTeX code blocks. The package
|
||||||
|
does not support multi-byte encoding for source code. To handle
|
||||||
|
UTF-8 you would need to use a custom template. This issue is
|
||||||
|
fully documented here: Encoding issue with the listings package.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--ii, ----iinnccrreemmeennttaall
|
||||||
|
Make list items in slide shows display incrementally (one by
|
||||||
|
one). The default is for lists to be displayed all at once.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----sslliiddee--lleevveell==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Specifies that headings with the specified level create slides
|
||||||
|
(for beamer, s5, slidy, slideous, dzslides). Headings above
|
||||||
|
this level in the hierarchy are used to divide the slide show
|
||||||
|
into sections; headings below this level create subheads within
|
||||||
|
a slide. Note that content that is not contained under slide-
|
||||||
|
level headings will not appear in the slide show. The default
|
||||||
|
is to set the slide level based on the contents of the document;
|
||||||
|
see Structuring the slide show.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----sseeccttiioonn--ddiivvss
|
||||||
|
Wrap sections in <section> tags (or <div> tags for html4), and
|
||||||
|
attach identifiers to the enclosing <section> (or <div>) rather
|
||||||
|
than the heading itself. See Heading identifiers, below.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eemmaaiill--oobbffuussccaattiioonn==nnoonnee|jjaavvaassccrriipptt|rreeffeerreenncceess
|
||||||
|
Specify a method for obfuscating mailto: links in HTML
|
||||||
|
documents. none leaves mailto: links as they are. javascript
|
||||||
|
obfuscates them using JavaScript. references obfuscates them by
|
||||||
|
printing their letters as decimal or hexadecimal character
|
||||||
|
references. The default is none.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----iidd--pprreeffiixx==_S_T_R_I_N_G
|
||||||
|
Specify a prefix to be added to all identifiers and internal
|
||||||
|
links in HTML and DocBook output, and to footnote numbers in
|
||||||
|
Markdown and Haddock output. This is useful for preventing
|
||||||
|
duplicate identifiers when generating fragments to be included
|
||||||
|
in other pages.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--TT _S_T_R_I_N_G, ----ttiittllee--pprreeffiixx==_S_T_R_I_N_G
|
||||||
|
Specify _S_T_R_I_N_G as a prefix at the beginning of the title that
|
||||||
|
appears in the HTML header (but not in the title as it appears
|
||||||
|
at the beginning of the HTML body). Implies --standalone.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
--cc _U_R_L, ----ccssss==_U_R_L
|
||||||
|
Link to a CSS style sheet. This option can be used repeatedly
|
||||||
|
to include multiple files. They will be included in the order
|
||||||
|
specified.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A stylesheet is required for generating EPUB. If none is
|
||||||
|
provided using this option (or the css or stylesheet metadata
|
||||||
|
fields), pandoc will look for a file epub.css in the user data
|
||||||
|
directory (see --data-dir). If it is not found there, sensible
|
||||||
|
defaults will be used.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----rreeffeerreennccee--ddoocc==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Use the specified file as a style reference in producing a docx
|
||||||
|
or ODT file.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Docx For best results, the reference docx should be a modified
|
||||||
|
version of a docx file produced using pandoc. The
|
||||||
|
contents of the reference docx are ignored, but its
|
||||||
|
stylesheets and document properties (including margins,
|
||||||
|
page size, header, and footer) are used in the new docx.
|
||||||
|
If no reference docx is specified on the command line,
|
||||||
|
pandoc will look for a file reference.docx in the user
|
||||||
|
data directory (see --data-dir). If this is not found
|
||||||
|
either, sensible defaults will be used.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To produce a custom reference.docx, first get a copy of
|
||||||
|
the default reference.docx: pandoc -o
|
||||||
|
custom-reference.docx --print-default-data-file
|
||||||
|
reference.docx. Then open custom-reference.docx in Word,
|
||||||
|
modify the styles as you wish, and save the file. For
|
||||||
|
best results, do not make changes to this file other than
|
||||||
|
modifying the styles used by pandoc:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Paragraph styles:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Normal
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Body Text
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• First Paragraph
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Compact
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Title
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Subtitle
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Author
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Date
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Abstract
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Bibliography
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 2
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 3
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 4
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 5
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 6
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 7
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 8
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Heading 9
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Block Text
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Footnote Text
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Definition Term
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Definition
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Caption
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Table Caption
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Image Caption
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Figure
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Captioned Figure
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• TOC Heading
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Character styles:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Default Paragraph Font
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Body Text Char
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Verbatim Char
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Footnote Reference
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Hyperlink
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Section Number
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Table style:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Table
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ODT For best results, the reference ODT should be a modified
|
||||||
|
version of an ODT produced using pandoc. The contents of
|
||||||
|
the reference ODT are ignored, but its stylesheets are
|
||||||
|
used in the new ODT. If no reference ODT is specified on
|
||||||
|
the command line, pandoc will look for a file
|
||||||
|
reference.odt in the user data directory (see
|
||||||
|
--data-dir). If this is not found either, sensible
|
||||||
|
defaults will be used.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To produce a custom reference.odt, first get a copy of
|
||||||
|
the default reference.odt: pandoc -o custom-reference.odt
|
||||||
|
--print-default-data-file reference.odt. Then open
|
||||||
|
custom-reference.odt in LibreOffice, modify the styles as
|
||||||
|
you wish, and save the file.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PowerPoint
|
||||||
|
Templates included with Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 (either
|
||||||
|
with .pptx or .potx extension) are known to work, as are
|
||||||
|
most templates derived from these.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The specific requirement is that the template should
|
||||||
|
begin with the following first four layouts:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. Title Slide
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
2. Title and Content
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
3. Section Header
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
4. Two Content
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
All templates included with a recent version of MS
|
||||||
|
PowerPoint will fit these criteria. (You can click on
|
||||||
|
Layout under the Home menu to check.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
You can also modify the default reference.pptx: first run
|
||||||
|
pandoc -o custom-reference.pptx --print-default-data-file
|
||||||
|
reference.pptx, and then modify custom-reference.pptx in
|
||||||
|
MS PowerPoint (pandoc will use the first four layout
|
||||||
|
slides, as mentioned above).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eeppuubb--ccoovveerr--iimmaaggee==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Use the specified image as the EPUB cover. It is recommended
|
||||||
|
that the image be less than 1000px in width and height. Note
|
||||||
|
that in a Markdown source document you can also specify
|
||||||
|
cover-image in a YAML metadata block (see EPUB Metadata, below).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eeppuubb--mmeettaaddaattaa==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Look in the specified XML file for metadata for the EPUB. The
|
||||||
|
file should contain a series of Dublin Core elements. For
|
||||||
|
example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<dc:rights>Creative Commons</dc:rights>
|
||||||
|
<dc:language>es-AR</dc:language>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
By default, pandoc will include the following metadata elements:
|
||||||
|
<dc:title> (from the document title), <dc:creator> (from the
|
||||||
|
document authors), <dc:date> (from the document date, which
|
||||||
|
should be in ISO 8601 format), <dc:language> (from the lang
|
||||||
|
variable, or, if is not set, the locale), and <dc:identifier
|
||||||
|
id="BookId"> (a randomly generated UUID). Any of these may be
|
||||||
|
overridden by elements in the metadata file.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: if the source document is Markdown, a YAML metadata block
|
||||||
|
in the document can be used instead. See below under EPUB
|
||||||
|
Metadata.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eeppuubb--eemmbbeedd--ffoonntt==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Embed the specified font in the EPUB. This option can be
|
||||||
|
repeated to embed multiple fonts. Wildcards can also be used:
|
||||||
|
for example, DejaVuSans-*.ttf. However, if you use wildcards on
|
||||||
|
the command line, be sure to escape them or put the whole
|
||||||
|
filename in single quotes, to prevent them from being
|
||||||
|
interpreted by the shell. To use the embedded fonts, you will
|
||||||
|
need to add declarations like the following to your CSS (see
|
||||||
|
--css):
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@font-face {
|
||||||
|
font-family: DejaVuSans;
|
||||||
|
font-style: normal;
|
||||||
|
font-weight: normal;
|
||||||
|
src:url("DejaVuSans-Regular.ttf");
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
@font-face {
|
||||||
|
font-family: DejaVuSans;
|
||||||
|
font-style: normal;
|
||||||
|
font-weight: bold;
|
||||||
|
src:url("DejaVuSans-Bold.ttf");
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
@font-face {
|
||||||
|
font-family: DejaVuSans;
|
||||||
|
font-style: italic;
|
||||||
|
font-weight: normal;
|
||||||
|
src:url("DejaVuSans-Oblique.ttf");
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
@font-face {
|
||||||
|
font-family: DejaVuSans;
|
||||||
|
font-style: italic;
|
||||||
|
font-weight: bold;
|
||||||
|
src:url("DejaVuSans-BoldOblique.ttf");
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
body { font-family: "DejaVuSans"; }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eeppuubb--cchhaapptteerr--lleevveell==_N_U_M_B_E_R
|
||||||
|
Specify the heading level at which to split the EPUB into
|
||||||
|
separate “chapter” files. The default is to split into chapters
|
||||||
|
at level-1 headings. This option only affects the internal
|
||||||
|
composition of the EPUB, not the way chapters and sections are
|
||||||
|
displayed to users. Some readers may be slow if the chapter
|
||||||
|
files are too large, so for large documents with few level-1
|
||||||
|
headings, one might want to use a chapter level of 2 or 3.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----eeppuubb--ssuubbddiirreeccttoorryy==_D_I_R_N_A_M_E
|
||||||
|
Specify the subdirectory in the OCF container that is to hold
|
||||||
|
the EPUB-specific contents. The default is EPUB. To put the
|
||||||
|
EPUB contents in the top level, use an empty string.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----iippyynnbb--oouuttppuutt==aallll||nnoonnee||bbeesstt
|
||||||
|
Determines how ipynb output cells are treated. all means that
|
||||||
|
all of the data formats included in the original are preserved.
|
||||||
|
none means that the contents of data cells are omitted. best
|
||||||
|
causes pandoc to try to pick the richest data block in each
|
||||||
|
output cell that is compatible with the output format. The
|
||||||
|
default is best.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ppddff--eennggiinnee==_P_R_O_G_R_A_M
|
||||||
|
Use the specified engine when producing PDF output. Valid
|
||||||
|
values are pdflatex, lualatex, xelatex, latexmk, tectonic,
|
||||||
|
wkhtmltopdf, weasyprint, prince, context, and pdfroff. If the
|
||||||
|
engine is not in your PATH, the full path of the engine may be
|
||||||
|
specified here. If this option is not specified, pandoc uses
|
||||||
|
the following defaults depending on the output format specified
|
||||||
|
using -t/--to:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• -t latex or none: pdflatex (other options: xelatex, lualatex,
|
||||||
|
tectonic, latexmk)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• -t context: context
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• -t html: wkhtmltopdf (other options: prince, weasyprint; see
|
||||||
|
print-css.rocks for a good introduction to PDF generation from
|
||||||
|
HTML/CSS.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• -t ms: pdfroff
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ppddff--eennggiinnee--oopptt==_S_T_R_I_N_G
|
||||||
|
Use the given string as a command-line argument to the
|
||||||
|
pdf-engine. For example, to use a persistent directory foo for
|
||||||
|
latexmk’s auxiliary files, use --pdf-engine-opt=-outdir=foo.
|
||||||
|
Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCiittaattiioonn rreennddeerriinngg
|
||||||
|
--CC, ----cciitteepprroocc
|
||||||
|
Process the citations in the file, replacing them with rendered
|
||||||
|
citations and adding a bibliography. Citation processing will
|
||||||
|
not take place unless bibliographic data is supplied, either
|
||||||
|
through an external file specified using the --bibliography
|
||||||
|
option or the bibliography field in metadata, or via a
|
||||||
|
references section in metadata containing a list of citations in
|
||||||
|
CSL YAML format with Markdown formatting. The style is
|
||||||
|
controlled by a CSL stylesheet specified using the --csl option
|
||||||
|
or the csl field in metadata. (If no stylesheet is specified,
|
||||||
|
the chicago-author-date style will be used by default.) The
|
||||||
|
citation processing transformation may be applied before or
|
||||||
|
after filters or Lua filters (see --filter, --lua-filter): these
|
||||||
|
transformations are applied in the order they appear on the
|
||||||
|
command line. For more information, see the section on
|
||||||
|
Citations.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Set the bibliography field in the document’s metadata to _F_I_L_E,
|
||||||
|
overriding any value set in the metadata. If you supply this
|
||||||
|
argument multiple times, each _F_I_L_E will be added to
|
||||||
|
bibliography. If _F_I_L_E is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
|
||||||
|
If _F_I_L_E is not found relative to the working directory, it will
|
||||||
|
be sought in the resource path (see --resource-path).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ccssll==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Set the csl field in the document’s metadata to _F_I_L_E, overriding
|
||||||
|
any value set in the metadata. (This is equivalent to
|
||||||
|
--metadata csl=FILE.) If _F_I_L_E is a URL, it will be fetched via
|
||||||
|
HTTP. If _F_I_L_E is not found relative to the working directory,
|
||||||
|
it will be sought in the resource path (see --resource-path) and
|
||||||
|
finally in the csl subdirectory of the pandoc user data
|
||||||
|
directory.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----cciittaattiioonn--aabbbbrreevviiaattiioonnss==_F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
Set the citation-abbreviations field in the document’s metadata
|
||||||
|
to _F_I_L_E, overriding any value set in the metadata. (This is
|
||||||
|
equivalent to --metadata citation-abbreviations=FILE.) If _F_I_L_E
|
||||||
|
is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP. If _F_I_L_E is not found
|
||||||
|
relative to the working directory, it will be sought in the
|
||||||
|
resource path (see --resource-path) and finally in the csl
|
||||||
|
subdirectory of the pandoc user data directory.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----nnaattbbiibb
|
||||||
|
Use natbib for citations in LaTeX output. This option is not
|
||||||
|
for use with the --citeproc option or with PDF output. It is
|
||||||
|
intended for use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed
|
||||||
|
with bibtex.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----bbiibbllaatteexx
|
||||||
|
Use biblatex for citations in LaTeX output. This option is not
|
||||||
|
for use with the --citeproc option or with PDF output. It is
|
||||||
|
intended for use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed
|
||||||
|
with bibtex or biber.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
MMaatthh rreennddeerriinngg iinn HHTTMMLL
|
||||||
|
The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using Unicode
|
||||||
|
characters. Formulas are put inside a span with class="math", so that
|
||||||
|
they may be styled differently from the surrounding text if needed.
|
||||||
|
However, this gives acceptable results only for basic math, usually you
|
||||||
|
will want to use --mathjax or another of the following options.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----mmaatthhjjaaxx[==_U_R_L]
|
||||||
|
Use MathJax to display embedded TeX math in HTML output. TeX
|
||||||
|
math will be put between \(...\) (for inline math) or \[...\]
|
||||||
|
(for display math) and wrapped in <span> tags with class math.
|
||||||
|
Then the MathJax JavaScript will render it. The _U_R_L should
|
||||||
|
point to the MathJax.js load script. If a _U_R_L is not provided,
|
||||||
|
a link to the Cloudflare CDN will be inserted.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----mmaatthhmmll
|
||||||
|
Convert TeX math to MathML (in epub3, docbook4, docbook5, jats,
|
||||||
|
html4 and html5). This is the default in odt output. Note that
|
||||||
|
currently only Firefox and Safari (and select e-book readers)
|
||||||
|
natively support MathML.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----wweebbtteexx[==_U_R_L]
|
||||||
|
Convert TeX formulas to <img> tags that link to an external
|
||||||
|
script that converts formulas to images. The formula will be
|
||||||
|
URL-encoded and concatenated with the URL provided. For SVG
|
||||||
|
images you can for example use --webtex
|
||||||
|
https://latex.codecogs.com/svg.latex?. If no URL is specified,
|
||||||
|
the CodeCogs URL generating PNGs will be used
|
||||||
|
(https://latex.codecogs.com/png.latex?). Note: the --webtex
|
||||||
|
option will affect Markdown output as well as HTML, which is
|
||||||
|
useful if you’re targeting a version of Markdown without native
|
||||||
|
math support.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----kkaatteexx[==_U_R_L]
|
||||||
|
Use KaTeX to display embedded TeX math in HTML output. The _U_R_L
|
||||||
|
is the base URL for the KaTeX library. That directory should
|
||||||
|
contain a katex.min.js and a katex.min.css file. If a _U_R_L is
|
||||||
|
not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----ggllaaddtteexx
|
||||||
|
Enclose TeX math in <eq> tags in HTML output. The resulting
|
||||||
|
HTML can then be processed by GladTeX to produce SVG images of
|
||||||
|
the typeset formulas and an HTML file with these images
|
||||||
|
embedded.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -s --gladtex input.md -o myfile.htex
|
||||||
|
gladtex -d image_dir myfile.htex
|
||||||
|
# produces myfile.html and images in image_dir
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOppttiioonnss ffoorr wwrraappppeerr ssccrriippttss
|
||||||
|
----dduummpp--aarrggss
|
||||||
|
Print information about command-line arguments to _s_t_d_o_u_t, then
|
||||||
|
exit. This option is intended primarily for use in wrapper
|
||||||
|
scripts. The first line of output contains the name of the
|
||||||
|
output file specified with the -o option, or - (for _s_t_d_o_u_t) if
|
||||||
|
no output file was specified. The remaining lines contain the
|
||||||
|
command-line arguments, one per line, in the order they appear.
|
||||||
|
These do not include regular pandoc options and their arguments,
|
||||||
|
but do include any options appearing after a -- separator at the
|
||||||
|
end of the line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----iiggnnoorree--aarrggss
|
||||||
|
Ignore command-line arguments (for use in wrapper scripts).
|
||||||
|
Regular pandoc options are not ignored. Thus, for example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --ignore-args -o foo.html -s foo.txt -- -e latin1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
is equivalent to
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -o foo.html -s
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EEXXIITT CCOODDEESS
|
||||||
|
If pandoc completes successfully, it will return exit code 0. Nonzero
|
||||||
|
exit codes have the following meanings:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Code Error
|
||||||
|
───────────────────────────────────────
|
||||||
|
3 PandocFailOnWarningError
|
||||||
|
4 PandocAppError
|
||||||
|
5 PandocTemplateError
|
||||||
|
6 PandocOptionError
|
||||||
|
21 PandocUnknownReaderError
|
||||||
|
22 PandocUnknownWriterError
|
||||||
|
23 PandocUnsupportedExtensionError
|
||||||
|
24 PandocCiteprocError
|
||||||
|
31 PandocEpubSubdirectoryError
|
||||||
|
43 PandocPDFError
|
||||||
|
44 PandocXMLError
|
||||||
|
47 PandocPDFProgramNotFoundError
|
||||||
|
61 PandocHttpError
|
||||||
|
62 PandocShouldNeverHappenError
|
||||||
|
63 PandocSomeError
|
||||||
|
64 PandocParseError
|
||||||
|
65 PandocParsecError
|
||||||
|
66 PandocMakePDFError
|
||||||
|
67 PandocSyntaxMapError
|
||||||
|
83 PandocFilterError
|
||||||
|
91 PandocMacroLoop
|
||||||
|
92 PandocUTF8DecodingError
|
||||||
|
93 PandocIpynbDecodingError
|
||||||
|
94 PandocUnsupportedCharsetError
|
||||||
|
97 PandocCouldNotFindDataFileError
|
||||||
|
99 PandocResourceNotFound
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
DDEEFFAAUULLTT FFIILLEESS
|
||||||
|
The --defaults option may be used to specify a package of options.
|
||||||
|
Here is a sample defaults file demonstrating all of the fields that may
|
||||||
|
be used:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
from: markdown+emoji
|
||||||
|
# reader: may be used instead of from:
|
||||||
|
to: html5
|
||||||
|
# writer: may be used instead of to:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# leave blank for output to stdout:
|
||||||
|
output-file:
|
||||||
|
# leave blank for input from stdin, use [] for no input:
|
||||||
|
input-files:
|
||||||
|
- preface.md
|
||||||
|
- content.md
|
||||||
|
# or you may use input-file: with a single value
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Include options from the specified defaults files.
|
||||||
|
# The files will be searched for first in the working directory
|
||||||
|
# and then in the defaults subdirectory of the user data directory.
|
||||||
|
# The files are included in the same order in which they appear in
|
||||||
|
# the list. Options specified in this defaults file always have
|
||||||
|
# priority over the included ones.
|
||||||
|
defaults:
|
||||||
|
- defsA
|
||||||
|
- defsB
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
template: letter
|
||||||
|
standalone: true
|
||||||
|
self-contained: false
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# note that structured variables may be specified:
|
||||||
|
variables:
|
||||||
|
documentclass: book
|
||||||
|
classoption:
|
||||||
|
- twosides
|
||||||
|
- draft
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# metadata values specified here are parsed as literal
|
||||||
|
# string text, not markdown:
|
||||||
|
metadata:
|
||||||
|
author:
|
||||||
|
- Sam Smith
|
||||||
|
- Julie Liu
|
||||||
|
metadata-files:
|
||||||
|
- boilerplate.yaml
|
||||||
|
# or you may use metadata-file: with a single value
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Note that these take files, not their contents:
|
||||||
|
include-before-body: []
|
||||||
|
include-after-body: []
|
||||||
|
include-in-header: []
|
||||||
|
resource-path: ["."]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# turn on built-in citation processing. Note that if you need
|
||||||
|
# control over when the citeproc processing is done relative
|
||||||
|
# to other filters, you should instead use `citeproc` in the
|
||||||
|
# list of `filters` (see below).
|
||||||
|
citeproc: true
|
||||||
|
csl: ieee
|
||||||
|
bibliography:
|
||||||
|
- foobar.bib
|
||||||
|
- barbaz.json
|
||||||
|
citation-abbreviations: abbrevs.json
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Filters will be assumed to be Lua filters if they have
|
||||||
|
# the .lua extension, and json filters otherwise. But
|
||||||
|
# the filter type can also be specified explicitly, as shown.
|
||||||
|
# Filters are run in the order specified.
|
||||||
|
# To include the built-in citeproc filter, use either `citeproc`
|
||||||
|
# or `{type: citeproc}`.
|
||||||
|
filters:
|
||||||
|
- wordcount.lua
|
||||||
|
- type: json
|
||||||
|
path: foo.lua
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
file-scope: false
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
data-dir:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# ERROR, WARNING, or INFO
|
||||||
|
verbosity: INFO
|
||||||
|
log-file: log.json
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# citeproc, natbib, or biblatex. This only affects LaTeX
|
||||||
|
# output. If you want to use citeproc to format citations,
|
||||||
|
# you should also set 'citeproc: true' (see above).
|
||||||
|
cite-method: citeproc
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# part, chapter, section, or default:
|
||||||
|
top-level-division: chapter
|
||||||
|
abbreviations:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pdf-engine: pdflatex
|
||||||
|
pdf-engine-opts:
|
||||||
|
- "-shell-escape"
|
||||||
|
# you may also use pdf-engine-opt: with a single option
|
||||||
|
# pdf-engine-opt: "-shell-escape"
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# auto, preserve, or none
|
||||||
|
wrap: auto
|
||||||
|
columns: 78
|
||||||
|
dpi: 72
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
extract-media: mediadir
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
table-of-contents: true
|
||||||
|
toc-depth: 2
|
||||||
|
number-sections: false
|
||||||
|
# a list of offsets at each heading level
|
||||||
|
number-offset: [0,0,0,0,0,0]
|
||||||
|
# toc: may also be used instead of table-of-contents:
|
||||||
|
shift-heading-level-by: 1
|
||||||
|
section-divs: true
|
||||||
|
identifier-prefix: foo
|
||||||
|
title-prefix: ""
|
||||||
|
strip-empty-paragraphs: true
|
||||||
|
# lf, crlf, or native
|
||||||
|
eol: lf
|
||||||
|
strip-comments: false
|
||||||
|
indented-code-classes: []
|
||||||
|
ascii: true
|
||||||
|
default-image-extension: ".jpg"
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# either a style name of a style definition file:
|
||||||
|
highlight-style: pygments
|
||||||
|
syntax-definitions:
|
||||||
|
- c.xml
|
||||||
|
# or you may use syntax-definition: with a single value
|
||||||
|
listings: false
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
reference-doc: myref.docx
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# method is plain, webtex, gladtex, mathml, mathjax, katex
|
||||||
|
# you may specify a url with webtex, mathjax, katex
|
||||||
|
html-math-method:
|
||||||
|
method: mathjax
|
||||||
|
url: "https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/mathjax@3/es5/tex-mml-chtml.js"
|
||||||
|
# none, references, or javascript
|
||||||
|
email-obfuscation: javascript
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
tab-stop: 8
|
||||||
|
preserve-tabs: true
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
incremental: false
|
||||||
|
slide-level: 2
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
epub-subdirectory: EPUB
|
||||||
|
epub-metadata: meta.xml
|
||||||
|
epub-fonts:
|
||||||
|
- foobar.otf
|
||||||
|
epub-chapter-level: 1
|
||||||
|
epub-cover-image: cover.jpg
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
reference-links: true
|
||||||
|
# block, section, or document
|
||||||
|
reference-location: block
|
||||||
|
markdown-headings: setext
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# accept, reject, or all
|
||||||
|
track-changes: accept
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
html-q-tags: false
|
||||||
|
css:
|
||||||
|
- site.css
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# none, all, or best
|
||||||
|
ipynb-output: best
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# A list of two-element lists
|
||||||
|
request-headers:
|
||||||
|
- ["User-Agent", "Mozilla/5.0"]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
fail-if-warnings: false
|
||||||
|
dump-args: false
|
||||||
|
ignore-args: false
|
||||||
|
trace: false
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Fields that are omitted will just have their regular default values.
|
||||||
|
So a defaults file can be as simple as one line:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
verbosity: INFO
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In fields that expect a file path (or list of file paths), the
|
||||||
|
following syntax may be used to interpolate environment variables:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
csl: ${HOME}/mycsldir/special.csl
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${USERDATA} may also be used; this will always resolve to the user data
|
||||||
|
directory that is current when the defaults file is parsed, regardless
|
||||||
|
of the setting of the environment variable USERDATA.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${.} will resolve to the directory containing the default file itself.
|
||||||
|
This allows you to refer to resources contained in that directory:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
epub-cover-image: ${.}/cover.jpg
|
||||||
|
epub-metadata: ${.}/meta.xml
|
||||||
|
resource-path:
|
||||||
|
- . # the working directory from which pandoc is run
|
||||||
|
- ${.}/images # the images subdirectory of the directory
|
||||||
|
# containing this defaults file
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This environment variable interpolation syntax _o_n_l_y works in fields
|
||||||
|
that expect file paths.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Default files can be placed in the defaults subdirectory of the user
|
||||||
|
data directory and used from any directory. For example, one could
|
||||||
|
create a file specifying defaults for writing letters, save it as
|
||||||
|
letter.yaml in the defaults subdirectory of the user data directory,
|
||||||
|
and then invoke these defaults from any directory using pandoc
|
||||||
|
--defaults letter or pandoc -dletter.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When multiple defaults are used, their contents will be combined.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that, where command-line arguments may be repeated
|
||||||
|
(--metadata-file, --css, --include-in-header, --include-before-body,
|
||||||
|
--include-after-body, --variable, --metadata, --syntax-definition), the
|
||||||
|
values specified on the command line will combine with values specified
|
||||||
|
in the defaults file, rather than replacing them.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
TTEEMMPPLLAATTEESS
|
||||||
|
When the -s/--standalone option is used, pandoc uses a template to add
|
||||||
|
header and footer material that is needed for a self-standing document.
|
||||||
|
To see the default template that is used, just type
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -D *FORMAT*
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
where _F_O_R_M_A_T is the name of the output format. A custom template can
|
||||||
|
be specified using the --template option. You can also override the
|
||||||
|
system default templates for a given output format _F_O_R_M_A_T by putting a
|
||||||
|
file templates/default.*FORMAT* in the user data directory (see
|
||||||
|
--data-dir, above). _E_x_c_e_p_t_i_o_n_s_:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• For odt output, customize the default.opendocument template.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• For pdf output, customize the default.latex template (or the
|
||||||
|
default.context template, if you use -t context, or the default.ms
|
||||||
|
template, if you use -t ms, or the default.html template, if you use
|
||||||
|
-t html).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• docx and pptx have no template (however, you can use --reference-doc
|
||||||
|
to customize the output).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Templates contain _v_a_r_i_a_b_l_e_s, which allow for the inclusion of arbitrary
|
||||||
|
information at any point in the file. They may be set at the command
|
||||||
|
line using the -V/--variable option. If a variable is not set, pandoc
|
||||||
|
will look for the key in the document’s metadata, which can be set
|
||||||
|
using either YAML metadata blocks or with the -M/--metadata option. In
|
||||||
|
addition, some variables are given default values by pandoc. See
|
||||||
|
Variables below for a list of variables used in pandoc’s default
|
||||||
|
templates.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you use custom templates, you may need to revise them as pandoc
|
||||||
|
changes. We recommend tracking the changes in the default templates,
|
||||||
|
and modifying your custom templates accordingly. An easy way to do
|
||||||
|
this is to fork the pandoc-templates repository and merge in changes
|
||||||
|
after each pandoc release.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
TTeemmppllaattee ssyynnttaaxx
|
||||||
|
CCoommmmeennttss
|
||||||
|
Anything between the sequence $-- and the end of the line will be
|
||||||
|
treated as a comment and omitted from the output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
DDeelliimmiitteerrss
|
||||||
|
To mark variables and control structures in the template, either $...$
|
||||||
|
or ${...} may be used as delimiters. The styles may also be mixed in
|
||||||
|
the same template, but the opening and closing delimiter must match in
|
||||||
|
each case. The opening delimiter may be followed by one or more spaces
|
||||||
|
or tabs, which will be ignored. The closing delimiter may be followed
|
||||||
|
by one or more spaces or tabs, which will be ignored.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To include a literal $ in the document, use $$.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInntteerrppoollaatteedd vvaarriiaabblleess
|
||||||
|
A slot for an interpolated variable is a variable name surrounded by
|
||||||
|
matched delimiters. Variable names must begin with a letter and can
|
||||||
|
contain letters, numbers, _, -, and .. The keywords it, if, else,
|
||||||
|
endif, for, sep, and endfor may not be used as variable names.
|
||||||
|
Examples:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$foo$
|
||||||
|
$foo.bar.baz$
|
||||||
|
$foo_bar.baz-bim$
|
||||||
|
$ foo $
|
||||||
|
${foo}
|
||||||
|
${foo.bar.baz}
|
||||||
|
${foo_bar.baz-bim}
|
||||||
|
${ foo }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Variable names with periods are used to get at structured variable
|
||||||
|
values. So, for example, employee.salary will return the value of the
|
||||||
|
salary field of the object that is the value of the employee field.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the value of the variable is simple value, it will be rendered
|
||||||
|
verbatim. (Note that no escaping is done; the assumption is that the
|
||||||
|
calling program will escape the strings appropriately for the output
|
||||||
|
format.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the value is a list, the values will be concatenated.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the value is a map, the string true will be rendered.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Every other value will be rendered as the empty string.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCoonnddiittiioonnaallss
|
||||||
|
A conditional begins with if(variable) (enclosed in matched delimiters)
|
||||||
|
and ends with endif (enclosed in matched delimiters). It may
|
||||||
|
optionally contain an else (enclosed in matched delimiters). The if
|
||||||
|
section is used if variable has a non-empty value, otherwise the else
|
||||||
|
section is used (if present). Examples:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$if(foo)$bar$endif$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$if(foo)$
|
||||||
|
$foo$
|
||||||
|
$endif$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$if(foo)$
|
||||||
|
part one
|
||||||
|
$else$
|
||||||
|
part two
|
||||||
|
$endif$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${if(foo)}bar${endif}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${if(foo)}
|
||||||
|
${foo}
|
||||||
|
${endif}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${if(foo)}
|
||||||
|
${ foo.bar }
|
||||||
|
${else}
|
||||||
|
no foo!
|
||||||
|
${endif}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The keyword elseif may be used to simplify complex nested conditionals:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$if(foo)$
|
||||||
|
XXX
|
||||||
|
$elseif(bar)$
|
||||||
|
YYY
|
||||||
|
$else$
|
||||||
|
ZZZ
|
||||||
|
$endif$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FFoorr llooooppss
|
||||||
|
A for loop begins with for(variable) (enclosed in matched delimiters)
|
||||||
|
and ends with endfor (enclosed in matched delimiters.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If variable is an array, the material inside the loop will be
|
||||||
|
evaluated repeatedly, with variable being set to each value of the
|
||||||
|
array in turn, and concatenated.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If variable is a map, the material inside will be set to the map.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the value of the associated variable is not an array or a map, a
|
||||||
|
single iteration will be performed on its value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Examples:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(foo)$$foo$$sep$, $endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(foo)$
|
||||||
|
- $foo.last$, $foo.first$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ for(foo.bar) }
|
||||||
|
- ${ foo.bar.last }, ${ foo.bar.first }
|
||||||
|
${ endfor }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(mymap)$
|
||||||
|
$it.name$: $it.office$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
You may optionally specify a separator between consecutive values using
|
||||||
|
sep (enclosed in matched delimiters). The material between sep and the
|
||||||
|
endfor is the separator.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ for(foo) }${ foo }${ sep }, ${ endfor }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Instead of using variable inside the loop, the special anaphoric
|
||||||
|
keyword it may be used.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ for(foo.bar) }
|
||||||
|
- ${ it.last }, ${ it.first }
|
||||||
|
${ endfor }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PPaarrttiiaallss
|
||||||
|
Partials (subtemplates stored in different files) may be included by
|
||||||
|
using the name of the partial, followed by (), for example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ styles() }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Partials will be sought in the directory containing the main template.
|
||||||
|
The file name will be assumed to have the same extension as the main
|
||||||
|
template if it lacks an extension. When calling the partial, the full
|
||||||
|
name including file extension can also be used:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ styles.html() }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(If a partial is not found in the directory of the template and the
|
||||||
|
template path is given as a relative path, it will also be sought in
|
||||||
|
the templates subdirectory of the user data directory.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Partials may optionally be applied to variables using a colon:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ date:fancy() }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ articles:bibentry() }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If articles is an array, this will iterate over its values, applying
|
||||||
|
the partial bibentry() to each one. So the second example above is
|
||||||
|
equivalent to
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${ for(articles) }
|
||||||
|
${ it:bibentry() }
|
||||||
|
${ endfor }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that the anaphoric keyword it must be used when iterating over
|
||||||
|
partials. In the above examples, the bibentry partial should contain
|
||||||
|
it.title (and so on) instead of articles.title.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Final newlines are omitted from included partials.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Partials may include other partials.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A separator between values of an array may be specified in square
|
||||||
|
brackets, immediately after the variable name or partial:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${months[, ]}$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
${articles:bibentry()[; ]$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The separator in this case is literal and (unlike with sep in an
|
||||||
|
explicit for loop) cannot contain interpolated variables or other
|
||||||
|
template directives.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
NNeessttiinngg
|
||||||
|
To ensure that content is “nested,” that is, subsequent lines indented,
|
||||||
|
use the ^ directive:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$item.number$ $^$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In this example, if item.description has multiple lines, they will all
|
||||||
|
be indented to line up with the first line:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
00123 A fine bottle of 18-year old
|
||||||
|
Oban whiskey. ($148)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To nest multiple lines to the same level, align them with the ^
|
||||||
|
directive in the template. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$item.number$ $^$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
|
||||||
|
(Available til $item.sellby$.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
will produce
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
00123 A fine bottle of 18-year old
|
||||||
|
Oban whiskey. ($148)
|
||||||
|
(Available til March 30, 2020.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If a variable occurs by itself on a line, preceded by whitespace and
|
||||||
|
not followed by further text or directives on the same line, and the
|
||||||
|
variable’s value contains multiple lines, it will be nested
|
||||||
|
automatically.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
BBrreeaakkaabbllee ssppaacceess
|
||||||
|
Normally, spaces in the template itself (as opposed to values of the
|
||||||
|
interpolated variables) are not breakable, but they can be made
|
||||||
|
breakable in part of the template by using the ~ keyword (ended with
|
||||||
|
another ~).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$~$This long line may break if the document is rendered
|
||||||
|
with a short line length.$~$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PPiippeess
|
||||||
|
A pipe transforms the value of a variable or partial. Pipes are
|
||||||
|
specified using a slash (/) between the variable name (or partial) and
|
||||||
|
the pipe name. Example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(name)$
|
||||||
|
$name/uppercase$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(metadata/pairs)$
|
||||||
|
- $it.key$: $it.value$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$employee:name()/uppercase$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pipes may be chained:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(employees/pairs)$
|
||||||
|
$it.key/alpha/uppercase$. $it.name$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Some pipes take parameters:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|----------------------|------------|
|
||||||
|
$for(employee)$
|
||||||
|
$it.name.first/uppercase/left 20 "| "$$it.name.salary/right 10 " | " " |"$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|----------------------|------------|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Currently the following pipes are predefined:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• pairs: Converts a map or array to an array of maps, each with key and
|
||||||
|
value fields. If the original value was an array, the key will be
|
||||||
|
the array index, starting with 1.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• uppercase: Converts text to uppercase.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• lowercase: Converts text to lowercase.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• length: Returns the length of the value: number of characters for a
|
||||||
|
textual value, number of elements for a map or array.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• reverse: Reverses a textual value or array, and has no effect on
|
||||||
|
other values.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• first: Returns the first value of an array, if applied to a non-empty
|
||||||
|
array; otherwise returns the original value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• last: Returns the last value of an array, if applied to a non-empty
|
||||||
|
array; otherwise returns the original value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• rest: Returns all but the first value of an array, if applied to a
|
||||||
|
non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• allbutlast: Returns all but the last value of an array, if applied to
|
||||||
|
a non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• chomp: Removes trailing newlines (and breakable space).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• nowrap: Disables line wrapping on breakable spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• alpha: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer into
|
||||||
|
lowercase alphabetic characters a..z (mod 26). This can be used to
|
||||||
|
get lettered enumeration from array indices. To get uppercase
|
||||||
|
letters, chain with uppercase.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• roman: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer into
|
||||||
|
lowercase roman numerials. This can be used to get lettered
|
||||||
|
enumeration from array indices. To get uppercase roman, chain with
|
||||||
|
uppercase.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• left n "leftborder" "rightborder": Renders a textual value in a block
|
||||||
|
of width n, aligned to the left, with an optional left and right
|
||||||
|
border. Has no effect on other values. This can be used to align
|
||||||
|
material in tables. Widths are positive integers indicating the
|
||||||
|
number of characters. Borders are strings inside double quotes;
|
||||||
|
literal " and \ characters must be backslash-escaped.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• right n "leftborder" "rightborder": Renders a textual value in a
|
||||||
|
block of width n, aligned to the right, and has no effect on other
|
||||||
|
values.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• center n "leftborder" "rightborder": Renders a textual value in a
|
||||||
|
block of width n, aligned to the center, and has no effect on other
|
||||||
|
values.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess
|
||||||
|
MMeettaaddaattaa vvaarriiaabblleess
|
||||||
|
ttiittllee, aauutthhoorr, ddaattee
|
||||||
|
allow identification of basic aspects of the document. Included
|
||||||
|
in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt. These can be set
|
||||||
|
through a pandoc title block, which allows for multiple authors,
|
||||||
|
or through a YAML metadata block:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
author:
|
||||||
|
- Aristotle
|
||||||
|
- Peter Abelard
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that if you just want to set PDF or HTML metadata, without
|
||||||
|
including a title block in the document itself, you can set the
|
||||||
|
title-meta, author-meta, and date-meta variables. (By default
|
||||||
|
these are set automatically, based on title, author, and date.)
|
||||||
|
The page title in HTML is set by pagetitle, which is equal to
|
||||||
|
title by default.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ssuubbttiittllee
|
||||||
|
document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and
|
||||||
|
docx documents
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
aabbssttrraacctt
|
||||||
|
document summary, included in LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and docx
|
||||||
|
documents
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
kkeeyywwoorrddss
|
||||||
|
list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, ODT, pptx, docx
|
||||||
|
and AsciiDoc metadata; repeat as for author, above
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ssuubbjjeecctt
|
||||||
|
document subject, included in ODT, PDF, docx and pptx metadata
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ddeessccrriippttiioonn
|
||||||
|
document description, included in ODT, docx and pptx metadata.
|
||||||
|
Some applications show this as Comments metadata.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccaatteeggoorryy
|
||||||
|
document category, included in docx and pptx metadata
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Additionally, any root-level string metadata, not included in ODT, docx
|
||||||
|
or pptx metadata is added as a _c_u_s_t_o_m _p_r_o_p_e_r_t_y. The following YAML
|
||||||
|
metadata block for instance:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
title: 'This is the title'
|
||||||
|
subtitle: "This is the subtitle"
|
||||||
|
author:
|
||||||
|
- Author One
|
||||||
|
- Author Two
|
||||||
|
description: |
|
||||||
|
This is a long
|
||||||
|
description.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
It consists of two paragraphs
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
will include title, author and description as standard document
|
||||||
|
properties and subtitle as a custom property when converting to docx,
|
||||||
|
ODT or pptx.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLaanngguuaaggee vvaarriiaabblleess
|
||||||
|
llaanngg identifies the main language of the document using IETF language
|
||||||
|
tags (following the BCP 47 standard), such as en or en-GB. The
|
||||||
|
Language subtag lookup tool can look up or verify these tags.
|
||||||
|
This affects most formats, and controls hyphenation in PDF
|
||||||
|
output when using LaTeX (through babel and polyglossia) or
|
||||||
|
ConTeXt.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Use native pandoc Divs and Spans with the lang attribute to
|
||||||
|
switch the language:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
lang: en-GB
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Text in the main document language (British English).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {lang=fr-CA}
|
||||||
|
> Cette citation est écrite en français canadien.
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
More text in English. ['Zitat auf Deutsch.']{lang=de}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ddiirr the base script direction, either rtl (right-to-left) or ltr
|
||||||
|
(left-to-right).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For bidirectional documents, native pandoc spans and divs with
|
||||||
|
the dir attribute (value rtl or ltr) can be used to override the
|
||||||
|
base direction in some output formats. This may not always be
|
||||||
|
necessary if the final renderer (e.g. the browser, when
|
||||||
|
generating HTML) supports the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the xelatex
|
||||||
|
engine is fully supported (use --pdf-engine=xelatex).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr HHTTMMLL
|
||||||
|
ddooccuummeenntt--ccssss
|
||||||
|
Enables inclusion of most of the CSS in the styles.html partial
|
||||||
|
(have a look with pandoc
|
||||||
|
--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html). Unless you
|
||||||
|
use --css, this variable is set to true by default. You can
|
||||||
|
disable it with e.g. pandoc -M document-css=false.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaaiinnffoonntt
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS font-family property on the html element.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttssiizzee
|
||||||
|
sets the base CSS font-size, which you’d usually set to
|
||||||
|
e.g. 20px, but it also accepts pt (12pt = 16px in most
|
||||||
|
browsers).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttccoolloorr
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS color property on the html element.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinnkkccoolloorr
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS color property on all links.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmoonnooffoonntt
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS font-family property on code elements.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmoonnoobbaacckkggrroouunnddccoolloorr
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS background-color property on code elements and adds
|
||||||
|
extra padding.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinneessttrreettcchh
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS line-height property on the html element, which is
|
||||||
|
preferred to be unitless.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbaacckkggrroouunnddccoolloorr
|
||||||
|
sets the CSS background-color property on the html element.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaarrggiinn--lleefftt, mmaarrggiinn--rriigghhtt, mmaarrggiinn--ttoopp, mmaarrggiinn--bboottttoomm
|
||||||
|
sets the corresponding CSS padding properties on the body
|
||||||
|
element.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To override or extend some CSS for just one document, include for
|
||||||
|
example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
header-includes: |
|
||||||
|
<style>
|
||||||
|
blockquote {
|
||||||
|
font-style: italic;
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
tr.even {
|
||||||
|
background-color: #f0f0f0;
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
td, th {
|
||||||
|
padding: 0.5em 2em 0.5em 0.5em;
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
tbody {
|
||||||
|
border-bottom: none;
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
</style>
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr HHTTMMLL mmaatthh
|
||||||
|
ccllaassssooppttiioonn
|
||||||
|
when using KaTeX, you can render display math equations flush
|
||||||
|
left using YAML metadata or with -M classoption=fleqn.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr HHTTMMLL sslliiddeess
|
||||||
|
These affect HTML output when [producing slide shows with pandoc].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinnssttiittuuttee
|
||||||
|
author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple
|
||||||
|
authors
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
rreevveeaalljjss--uurrll
|
||||||
|
base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to
|
||||||
|
https://unpkg.com/reveal.js@^4/)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ss55--uurrll base URL for S5 documents (defaults to s5/default)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
sslliiddyy--uurrll
|
||||||
|
base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
|
||||||
|
https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
sslliiddeeoouuss--uurrll
|
||||||
|
base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to slideous)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttiittllee--sslliiddee--aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
additional attributes for the title slide of reveal.js slide
|
||||||
|
shows. See background in reveal.js and beamer for an example.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
All reveal.js configuration options are available as variables. To
|
||||||
|
turn off boolean flags that default to true in reveal.js, use 0.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr BBeeaammeerr sslliiddeess
|
||||||
|
These variables change the appearance of PDF slides using beamer.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
aassppeeccttrraattiioo
|
||||||
|
slide aspect ratio (43 for 4:3 [default], 169 for 16:9, 1610 for
|
||||||
|
16:10, 149 for 14:9, 141 for 1.41:1, 54 for 5:4, 32 for 3:2)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbeeaammeerraarrttiiccllee
|
||||||
|
produce an article from Beamer slides
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbeeaammeerrooppttiioonn
|
||||||
|
add extra beamer option with \setbeameroption{}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinnssttiittuuttee
|
||||||
|
author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple
|
||||||
|
authors
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
llooggoo logo image for slides
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
nnaavviiggaattiioonn
|
||||||
|
controls navigation symbols (default is empty for no navigation
|
||||||
|
symbols; other valid values are frame, vertical, and horizontal)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
sseeccttiioonn--ttiittlleess
|
||||||
|
enables “title pages” for new sections (default is true)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
tthheemmee, ccoolloorrtthheemmee, ffoonntttthheemmee, iinnnneerrtthheemmee, oouutteerrtthheemmee
|
||||||
|
beamer themes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
tthheemmeeooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttiittlleeggrraapphhiicc
|
||||||
|
image for title slide
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr PPoowweerrPPooiinntt
|
||||||
|
These variables control the visual aspects of a slide show that are not
|
||||||
|
easily controlled via templates.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmoonnooffoonntt
|
||||||
|
font to use for code.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr LLaaTTeeXX
|
||||||
|
Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with a LaTeX engine.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLaayyoouutt
|
||||||
|
bblloocckk--hheeaaddiinnggss
|
||||||
|
make \paragraph and \subparagraph (fourth- and fifth-level
|
||||||
|
headings, or fifth- and sixth-level with book classes) free-
|
||||||
|
standing rather than run-in; requires further formatting to
|
||||||
|
distinguish from \subsubsection (third- or fourth-level
|
||||||
|
headings). Instead of using this option, KOMA-Script can adjust
|
||||||
|
headings more extensively:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
documentclass: scrartcl
|
||||||
|
header-includes: |
|
||||||
|
\RedeclareSectionCommand[
|
||||||
|
beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
|
||||||
|
afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
|
||||||
|
font=\normalfont\itshape]{paragraph}
|
||||||
|
\RedeclareSectionCommand[
|
||||||
|
beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
|
||||||
|
afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
|
||||||
|
font=\normalfont\scshape,
|
||||||
|
indent=0pt]{subparagraph}
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccllaassssooppttiioonn
|
||||||
|
option for document class, e.g. oneside; repeat for multiple
|
||||||
|
options:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
classoption:
|
||||||
|
- twocolumn
|
||||||
|
- landscape
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ddooccuummeennttccllaassss
|
||||||
|
document class: usually one of the standard classes, article,
|
||||||
|
book, and report; the KOMA-Script equivalents, scrartcl,
|
||||||
|
scrbook, and scrreprt, which default to smaller margins; or
|
||||||
|
memoir
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ggeeoommeettrryy
|
||||||
|
option for geometry package, e.g. margin=1in; repeat for
|
||||||
|
multiple options:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
geometry:
|
||||||
|
- top=30mm
|
||||||
|
- left=20mm
|
||||||
|
- heightrounded
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
hhyyppeerrrreeffooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
option for hyperref package, e.g. linktoc=all; repeat for
|
||||||
|
multiple options:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
hyperrefoptions:
|
||||||
|
- linktoc=all
|
||||||
|
- pdfwindowui
|
||||||
|
- pdfpagemode=FullScreen
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinnddeenntt if true, pandoc will use document class settings for indentation
|
||||||
|
(the default LaTeX template otherwise removes indentation and
|
||||||
|
adds space between paragraphs)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinneessttrreettcchh
|
||||||
|
adjusts line spacing using the setspace package, e.g. 1.25, 1.5
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaarrggiinn--lleefftt, mmaarrggiinn--rriigghhtt, mmaarrggiinn--ttoopp, mmaarrggiinn--bboottttoomm
|
||||||
|
sets margins if geometry is not used (otherwise geometry
|
||||||
|
overrides these)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppaaggeessttyyllee
|
||||||
|
control \pagestyle{}: the default article class supports plain
|
||||||
|
(default), empty (no running heads or page numbers), and
|
||||||
|
headings (section titles in running heads)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppaappeerrssiizzee
|
||||||
|
paper size, e.g. letter, a4
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
sseeccnnuummddeepptthh
|
||||||
|
numbering depth for sections (with --number-sections option or
|
||||||
|
numbersections variable)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FFoonnttss
|
||||||
|
ffoonntteenncc
|
||||||
|
allows font encoding to be specified through fontenc package
|
||||||
|
(with pdflatex); default is T1 (see LaTeX font encodings guide)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttffaammiillyy
|
||||||
|
font package for use with pdflatex: TeX Live includes many
|
||||||
|
options, documented in the LaTeX Font Catalogue. The default is
|
||||||
|
Latin Modern.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttffaammiillyyooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
options for package used as fontfamily; repeat for multiple
|
||||||
|
options. For example, to use the Libertine font with
|
||||||
|
proportional lowercase (old-style) figures through the
|
||||||
|
libertinus package:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
fontfamily: libertinus
|
||||||
|
fontfamilyoptions:
|
||||||
|
- osf
|
||||||
|
- p
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttssiizzee
|
||||||
|
font size for body text. The standard classes allow 10pt, 11pt,
|
||||||
|
and 12pt. To use another size, set documentclass to one of the
|
||||||
|
KOMA-Script classes, such as scrartcl or scrbook.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaaiinnffoonntt, ssaannssffoonntt, mmoonnooffoonntt, mmaatthhffoonntt, CCJJKKmmaaiinnffoonntt
|
||||||
|
font families for use with xelatex or lualatex: take the name of
|
||||||
|
any system font, using the fontspec package. CJKmainfont uses
|
||||||
|
the xecjk package.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaaiinnffoonnttooppttiioonnss, ssaannssffoonnttooppttiioonnss, mmoonnooffoonnttooppttiioonnss, mmaatthhffoonnttooppttiioonnss,
|
||||||
|
CCJJKKooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
options to use with mainfont, sansfont, monofont, mathfont,
|
||||||
|
CJKmainfont in xelatex and lualatex. Allow for any choices
|
||||||
|
available through fontspec; repeat for multiple options. For
|
||||||
|
example, to use the TeX Gyre version of Palatino with lowercase
|
||||||
|
figures:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
mainfont: TeX Gyre Pagella
|
||||||
|
mainfontoptions:
|
||||||
|
- Numbers=Lowercase
|
||||||
|
- Numbers=Proportional
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmiiccrroottyyppeeooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
options to pass to the microtype package
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLiinnkkss
|
||||||
|
ccoolloorrlliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of
|
||||||
|
linkcolor, filecolor, citecolor, urlcolor, or toccolor are set
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinnkkccoolloorr, ffiilleeccoolloorr, cciitteeccoolloorr, uurrllccoolloorr, ttooccccoolloorr
|
||||||
|
color for internal links, external links, citation links, linked
|
||||||
|
URLs, and links in table of contents, respectively: uses options
|
||||||
|
allowed by xcolor, including the dvipsnames, svgnames, and
|
||||||
|
x11names lists
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinnkkss--aass--nnootteess
|
||||||
|
causes links to be printed as footnotes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FFrroonntt mmaatttteerr
|
||||||
|
llooff, lloott
|
||||||
|
include list of figures, list of tables
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
tthhaannkkss contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttoocc include table of contents (can also be set using
|
||||||
|
--toc/--table-of-contents)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttoocc--ddeepptthh
|
||||||
|
level of section to include in table of contents
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
BBiibbLLaaTTeeXX BBiibblliiooggrraapphhiieess
|
||||||
|
These variables function when using BibLaTeX for citation rendering.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbiibbllaatteexxooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
list of options for biblatex
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbiibblliioo--ssttyyllee
|
||||||
|
bibliography style, when used with --natbib and --biblatex.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbiibblliioo--ttiittllee
|
||||||
|
bibliography title, when used with --natbib and --biblatex.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy
|
||||||
|
bibliography to use for resolving references
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
nnaattbbiibbooppttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
list of options for natbib
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr CCoonnTTeeXXtt
|
||||||
|
Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with ConTeXt.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttssiizzee
|
||||||
|
font size for body text (e.g. 10pt, 12pt)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
hheeaaddeerrtteexxtt, ffooootteerrtteexxtt
|
||||||
|
text to be placed in running header or footer (see ConTeXt
|
||||||
|
Headers and Footers); repeat up to four times for different
|
||||||
|
placement
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinnddeennttiinngg
|
||||||
|
controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g. yes,small,next (see
|
||||||
|
ConTeXt Indentation); repeat for multiple options
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinntteerrlliinneessppaaccee
|
||||||
|
adjusts line spacing, e.g. 4ex (using setupinterlinespace);
|
||||||
|
repeat for multiple options
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
llaayyoouutt options for page margins and text arrangement (see ConTeXt
|
||||||
|
Layout); repeat for multiple options
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinnkkccoolloorr, ccoonnttrraassttccoolloorr
|
||||||
|
color for links outside and inside a page, e.g. red, blue (see
|
||||||
|
ConTeXt Color)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinnkkssttyyllee
|
||||||
|
typeface style for links, e.g. normal, bold, slanted,
|
||||||
|
boldslanted, type, cap, small
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
llooff, lloott
|
||||||
|
include list of figures, list of tables
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaaiinnffoonntt, ssaannssffoonntt, mmoonnooffoonntt, mmaatthhffoonntt
|
||||||
|
font families: take the name of any system font (see ConTeXt
|
||||||
|
Font Switching)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaarrggiinn--lleefftt, mmaarrggiinn--rriigghhtt, mmaarrggiinn--ttoopp, mmaarrggiinn--bboottttoomm
|
||||||
|
sets margins, if layout is not used (otherwise layout overrides
|
||||||
|
these)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppaaggeennuummbbeerriinngg
|
||||||
|
page number style and location (using setuppagenumbering);
|
||||||
|
repeat for multiple options
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppaappeerrssiizzee
|
||||||
|
paper size, e.g. letter, A4, landscape (see ConTeXt Paper
|
||||||
|
Setup); repeat for multiple options
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppddffaa adds to the preamble the setup necessary to generate PDF/A of
|
||||||
|
the type specified, e.g. 1a:2005, 2a. If no type is specified
|
||||||
|
(i.e. the value is set to True, by e.g. --metadata=pdfa or
|
||||||
|
pdfa: true in a YAML metadata block), 1b:2005 will be used as
|
||||||
|
default, for reasons of backwards compatibility. Using
|
||||||
|
--variable=pdfa without specified value is not supported. To
|
||||||
|
successfully generate PDF/A the required ICC color profiles have
|
||||||
|
to be available and the content and all included files (such as
|
||||||
|
images) have to be standard conforming. The ICC profiles and
|
||||||
|
output intent may be specified using the variables
|
||||||
|
pdfaiccprofile and pdfaintent. See also ConTeXt PDFA for more
|
||||||
|
details.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppddffaaiiccccpprrooffiillee
|
||||||
|
when used in conjunction with pdfa, specifies the ICC profile to
|
||||||
|
use in the PDF, e.g. default.cmyk. If left unspecified,
|
||||||
|
sRGB.icc is used as default. May be repeated to include
|
||||||
|
multiple profiles. Note that the profiles have to be available
|
||||||
|
on the system. They can be obtained from ConTeXt ICC Profiles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppddffaaiinntteenntt
|
||||||
|
when used in conjunction with pdfa, specifies the output intent
|
||||||
|
for the colors, e.g. ISO coated v2 300\letterpercent\space (ECI)
|
||||||
|
If left unspecified, sRGB IEC61966-2.1 is used as default.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttoocc include table of contents (can also be set using
|
||||||
|
--toc/--table-of-contents)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
wwhhiitteessppaaccee
|
||||||
|
spacing between paragraphs, e.g. none, small (using
|
||||||
|
setupwhitespace)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinncclluuddeessoouurrccee
|
||||||
|
include all source documents as file attachments in the PDF file
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr wwkkhhttmmllttooppddff
|
||||||
|
Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with wkhtmltopdf. The
|
||||||
|
--css option also affects the output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffooootteerr--hhttmmll, hheeaaddeerr--hhttmmll
|
||||||
|
add information to the header and footer
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmaarrggiinn--lleefftt, mmaarrggiinn--rriigghhtt, mmaarrggiinn--ttoopp, mmaarrggiinn--bboottttoomm
|
||||||
|
set the page margins
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppaappeerrssiizzee
|
||||||
|
sets the PDF paper size
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr mmaann ppaaggeess
|
||||||
|
aaddjjuussttiinngg
|
||||||
|
adjusts text to left (l), right (r), center (c), or both (b)
|
||||||
|
margins
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffooootteerr footer in man pages
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
hheeaaddeerr header in man pages
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
hhyypphheennaattee
|
||||||
|
if true (the default), hyphenation will be used
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
sseeccttiioonn
|
||||||
|
section number in man pages
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess ffoorr mmss
|
||||||
|
ffoonnttffaammiillyy
|
||||||
|
font family (e.g. T or P)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinnddeenntt paragraph indent (e.g. 2m)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinneehheeiigghhtt
|
||||||
|
line height (e.g. 12p)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppooiinnttssiizzee
|
||||||
|
point size (e.g. 10p)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVaarriiaabblleess sseett aauuttoommaattiiccaallllyy
|
||||||
|
Pandoc sets these variables automatically in response to options or
|
||||||
|
document contents; users can also modify them. These vary depending on
|
||||||
|
the output format, and include the following:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbooddyy body of document
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ddaattee--mmeettaa
|
||||||
|
the date variable converted to ISO 8601 YYYY-MM-DD, included in
|
||||||
|
all HTML based formats (dzslides, epub, html, html4, html5,
|
||||||
|
revealjs, s5, slideous, slidy). The recognized formats for date
|
||||||
|
are: mm/dd/yyyy, mm/dd/yy, yyyy-mm-dd (ISO 8601), dd MM yyyy
|
||||||
|
(e.g. either 02 Apr 2018 or 02 April 2018), MM dd, yyyy
|
||||||
|
(e.g. Apr. 02, 2018 or April 02,
|
||||||
|
2018),yyyy[mm[dd]]](e.g.20180402, 201804 or 2018).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
hheeaaddeerr--iinncclluuddeess
|
||||||
|
contents specified by -H/--include-in-header (may have multiple
|
||||||
|
values)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinncclluuddee--bbeeffoorree
|
||||||
|
contents specified by -B/--include-before-body (may have
|
||||||
|
multiple values)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iinncclluuddee--aafftteerr
|
||||||
|
contents specified by -A/--include-after-body (may have multiple
|
||||||
|
values)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
mmeettaa--jjssoonn
|
||||||
|
JSON representation of all of the document’s metadata. Field
|
||||||
|
values are transformed to the selected output format.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
nnuummbbeerrsseeccttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
non-null value if -N/--number-sections was specified
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ssoouurrcceeffiillee, oouuttppuuttffiillee
|
||||||
|
source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
|
||||||
|
sourcefile can also be a list if input comes from multiple
|
||||||
|
files, or empty if input is from stdin. You can use the
|
||||||
|
following snippet in your template to distinguish them:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$if(sourcefile)$
|
||||||
|
$for(sourcefile)$
|
||||||
|
$sourcefile$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
$else$
|
||||||
|
(stdin)
|
||||||
|
$endif$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Similarly, outputfile can be - if output goes to the terminal.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you need absolute paths, use e.g. $curdir$/$sourcefile$.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccuurrddiirr working directory from which pandoc is run.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttoocc non-null value if --toc/--table-of-contents was specified
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttoocc--ttiittllee
|
||||||
|
title of table of contents (works only with EPUB, HTML,
|
||||||
|
opendocument, odt, docx, pptx, beamer, LaTeX)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONNSS
|
||||||
|
The behavior of some of the readers and writers can be adjusted by
|
||||||
|
enabling or disabling various extensions.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
An extension can be enabled by adding +EXTENSION to the format name and
|
||||||
|
disabled by adding -EXTENSION. For example, --from
|
||||||
|
markdown_strict+footnotes is strict Markdown with footnotes enabled,
|
||||||
|
while --from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables is pandoc’s Markdown
|
||||||
|
without footnotes or pipe tables.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The markdown reader and writer make by far the most use of extensions.
|
||||||
|
Extensions only used by them are therefore covered in the section
|
||||||
|
Pandoc’s Markdown below (See Markdown variants for commonmark and gfm.)
|
||||||
|
In the following, extensions that also work for other formats are
|
||||||
|
covered.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that markdown extensions added to the ipynb format affect Markdown
|
||||||
|
cells in Jupyter notebooks (as do command-line options like
|
||||||
|
--atx-headers).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
TTyyppooggrraapphhyy
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssmmaarrtt
|
||||||
|
Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, --- as em-dashes, -- as
|
||||||
|
en-dashes, and ... as ellipses. Nonbreaking spaces are inserted after
|
||||||
|
certain abbreviations, such as “Mr.”
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
input formats
|
||||||
|
markdown, commonmark, latex, mediawiki, org, rst, twiki
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
markdown, latex, context, rst
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
enabled by default in
|
||||||
|
markdown, latex, context (both input and output)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: If you are _w_r_i_t_i_n_g Markdown, then the smart extension has the
|
||||||
|
reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes comes out straight.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In LaTeX, smart means to use the standard TeX ligatures for quotation
|
||||||
|
marks (`` and '' for double quotes, ` and ' for single quotes) and
|
||||||
|
dashes (-- for en-dash and --- for em-dash). If smart is disabled,
|
||||||
|
then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse these characters literally. In
|
||||||
|
writing LaTeX, enabling smart tells pandoc to use the ligatures when
|
||||||
|
possible; if smart is disabled pandoc will use unicode quotation mark
|
||||||
|
and dash characters.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
HHeeaaddiinnggss aanndd sseeccttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aauuttoo__iiddeennttiiffiieerrss
|
||||||
|
A heading without an explicitly specified identifier will be
|
||||||
|
automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the heading text.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
input formats
|
||||||
|
markdown, latex, rst, mediawiki, textile
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
markdown, muse
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
enabled by default in
|
||||||
|
markdown, muse
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The default algorithm used to derive the identifier from the heading
|
||||||
|
text is:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Remove all formatting, links, etc.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Remove all footnotes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Remove all non-alphanumeric characters, except underscores, hyphens,
|
||||||
|
and periods.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Replace all spaces and newlines with hyphens.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may not begin
|
||||||
|
with a number or punctuation mark).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If nothing is left after this, use the identifier section.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Thus, for example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Heading Identifier
|
||||||
|
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
|
||||||
|
Heading identifiers in heading-identifiers-in-html
|
||||||
|
HTML
|
||||||
|
Maître d'hôtel maître-dhôtel
|
||||||
|
*Dogs*?--in *my* house? dogs--in-my-house
|
||||||
|
[HTML], [S5], or [RTF]? html-s5-or-rtf
|
||||||
|
3. Applications applications
|
||||||
|
33 section
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the
|
||||||
|
identifier from the heading text. The exception is when several
|
||||||
|
headings have the same text; in this case, the first will get an
|
||||||
|
identifier as described above; the second will get the same identifier
|
||||||
|
with -1 appended; the third with -2; and so on.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(However, a different algorithm is used if gfm_auto_identifiers is
|
||||||
|
enabled; see below.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
|
||||||
|
contents generated by the --toc|--table-of-contents option. They also
|
||||||
|
make it easy to provide links from one section of a document to
|
||||||
|
another. A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the section on
|
||||||
|
[heading identifiers](#heading-identifiers-in-html-latex-and-context).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
|
||||||
|
only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the --section-divs option is specified, then each section will be
|
||||||
|
wrapped in a section (or a div, if html4 was specified), and the
|
||||||
|
identifier will be attached to the enclosing <section> (or <div>) tag
|
||||||
|
rather than the heading itself. This allows entire sections to be
|
||||||
|
manipulated using JavaScript or treated differently in CSS.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aasscciiii__iiddeennttiiffiieerrss
|
||||||
|
Causes the identifiers produced by auto_identifiers to be pure ASCII.
|
||||||
|
Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
|
||||||
|
letters are omitted.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ggffmm__aauuttoo__iiddeennttiiffiieerrss
|
||||||
|
Changes the algorithm used by auto_identifiers to conform to GitHub’s
|
||||||
|
method. Spaces are converted to dashes (-), uppercase characters to
|
||||||
|
lowercase characters, and punctuation characters other than - and _ are
|
||||||
|
removed. Emojis are replaced by their names.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
MMaatthh IInnppuutt
|
||||||
|
The extensions tex_math_dollars, tex_math_single_backslash, and
|
||||||
|
tex_math_double_backslash are described in the section about Pandoc’s
|
||||||
|
Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
However, they can also be used with HTML input. This is handy for
|
||||||
|
reading web pages formatted using MathJax, for example.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RRaaww HHTTMMLL//TTeeXX
|
||||||
|
The following extensions are described in more detail in their
|
||||||
|
respective sections of Pandoc’s Markdown:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• raw_html allows HTML elements which are not representable in pandoc’s
|
||||||
|
AST to be parsed as raw HTML. By default, this is disabled for HTML
|
||||||
|
input.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• raw_tex allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be included in a
|
||||||
|
document. This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following
|
||||||
|
formats (in addition to markdown):
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
input formats
|
||||||
|
latex, textile, html (environments, \ref, and \eqref only),
|
||||||
|
ipynb
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
textile, commonmark
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: as applied to ipynb, raw_html and raw_tex affect not only raw
|
||||||
|
TeX in markdown cells, but data with mime type text/html in output
|
||||||
|
cells. Since the ipynb reader attempts to preserve the richest
|
||||||
|
possible outputs when several options are given, you will get best
|
||||||
|
results if you disable raw_html and raw_tex when converting to
|
||||||
|
formats like docx which don’t allow raw html or tex.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• native_divs causes HTML div elements to be parsed as native pandoc
|
||||||
|
Div blocks. If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use -f
|
||||||
|
html-native_divs+raw_html.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• native_spans causes HTML span elements to be parsed as native pandoc
|
||||||
|
Span inlines. If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use -f
|
||||||
|
html-native_spans+raw_html. If you want to drop all divs and spans
|
||||||
|
when converting HTML to Markdown, you can use pandoc -f
|
||||||
|
html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLiitteerraattee HHaasskkeellll ssuuppppoorrtt
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: lliitteerraattee__hhaasskkeellll
|
||||||
|
Treat the document as literate Haskell source.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
input formats
|
||||||
|
markdown, rst, latex
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
markdown, rst, latex, html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you append +lhs (or +literate_haskell) to one of the formats above,
|
||||||
|
pandoc will treat the document as literate Haskell source. This means
|
||||||
|
that
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In Markdown input, “bird track” sections will be parsed as Haskell
|
||||||
|
code rather than block quotations. Text between \begin{code} and
|
||||||
|
\end{code} will also be treated as Haskell code. For ATX-style
|
||||||
|
headings the character `=' will be used instead of `#'.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In Markdown output, code blocks with classes haskell and literate
|
||||||
|
will be rendered using bird tracks, and block quotations will be
|
||||||
|
indented one space, so they will not be treated as Haskell code. In
|
||||||
|
addition, headings will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
|
||||||
|
rather than ATX-style (with `#' characters). (This is because ghc
|
||||||
|
treats `#' characters in column 1 as introducing line numbers.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In restructured text input, “bird track” sections will be parsed as
|
||||||
|
Haskell code.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In restructured text output, code blocks with class haskell will be
|
||||||
|
rendered using bird tracks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In LaTeX input, text in code environments will be parsed as Haskell
|
||||||
|
code.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In LaTeX output, code blocks with class haskell will be rendered
|
||||||
|
inside code environments.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In HTML output, code blocks with class haskell will be rendered with
|
||||||
|
class literatehaskell and bird tracks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Examples:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
reads literate Haskell source formatted with Markdown conventions and
|
||||||
|
writes ordinary HTML (without bird tracks).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html+lhs
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
writes HTML with the Haskell code in bird tracks, so it can be copied
|
||||||
|
and pasted as literate Haskell source.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indented
|
||||||
|
literate code blocks (e.g. inside an itemized environment) will not be
|
||||||
|
picked up by the Haskell compiler.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOtthheerr eexxtteennssiioonnss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: eemmppttyy__ppaarraaggrraapphhss
|
||||||
|
Allows empty paragraphs. By default empty paragraphs are omitted.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
input formats
|
||||||
|
docx, html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
docx, odt, opendocument, html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: nnaattiivvee__nnuummbbeerriinngg
|
||||||
|
Enables native numbering of figures and tables. Enumeration starts at
|
||||||
|
1.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
odt, opendocument
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: xxrreeffss__nnaammee
|
||||||
|
Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
|
||||||
|
substituted with cross-references that will use the name or caption of
|
||||||
|
the referenced item. The original link text is replaced once the
|
||||||
|
generated document is refreshed. This extension can be combined with
|
||||||
|
xrefs_number in which case numbers will appear before the name.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Text in cross-references is only made consistent with the referenced
|
||||||
|
item once the document has been refreshed.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
odt, opendocument
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: xxrreeffss__nnuummbbeerr
|
||||||
|
Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
|
||||||
|
substituted with cross-references that will use the number of the
|
||||||
|
referenced item. The original link text is discarded. This extension
|
||||||
|
can be combined with xrefs_name in which case the name or caption
|
||||||
|
numbers will appear after the number.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For the xrefs_number to be useful heading numbers must be enabled in
|
||||||
|
the generated document, also table and figure captions must be enabled
|
||||||
|
using for example the native_numbering extension.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Numbers in cross-references are only visible in the final document once
|
||||||
|
it has been refreshed.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
output formats
|
||||||
|
odt, opendocument
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssttyylleess
|
||||||
|
When converting from docx, read all docx styles as divs (for paragraph
|
||||||
|
styles) and spans (for character styles) regardless of whether pandoc
|
||||||
|
understands the meaning of these styles. This can be used with docx
|
||||||
|
custom styles. Disabled by default.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
input formats
|
||||||
|
docx
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aammuussee
|
||||||
|
In the muse input format, this enables Text::Amuse extensions to Emacs
|
||||||
|
Muse markup.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: rraaww__mmaarrkkddoowwnn
|
||||||
|
In the ipynb input format, this causes Markdown cells to be included as
|
||||||
|
raw Markdown blocks (allowing lossless round-tripping) rather than
|
||||||
|
being parsed. Use this only when you are targeting ipynb or a
|
||||||
|
markdown-based output format.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: cciittaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
Some aspects of Pandoc’s Markdown citation syntax are also accepted in
|
||||||
|
org input.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: eelleemmeenntt__cciittaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
In the jats output formats, this causes reference items to be replaced
|
||||||
|
with <element-citation> elements. These elements are not influenced by
|
||||||
|
CSL styles, but all information on the item is included in tags.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: nnttbb
|
||||||
|
In the context output format this enables the use of Natural Tables
|
||||||
|
(TABLE) instead of the default Extreme Tables (xtables). Natural
|
||||||
|
tables allow more fine-grained global customization but come at a
|
||||||
|
performance penalty compared to extreme tables.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PPAANNDDOOCC’’SS MMAARRKKDDOOWWNN
|
||||||
|
Pandoc understands an extended and slightly revised version of John
|
||||||
|
Gruber’s Markdown syntax. This document explains the syntax, noting
|
||||||
|
differences from standard Markdown. Except where noted, these
|
||||||
|
differences can be suppressed by using the markdown_strict format
|
||||||
|
instead of markdown. Extensions can be enabled or disabled to specify
|
||||||
|
the behavior more granularly. They are described in the following.
|
||||||
|
See also Extensions above, for extensions that work also on other
|
||||||
|
formats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PPhhiilloossoopphhyy
|
||||||
|
Markdown is designed to be easy to write, and, even more importantly,
|
||||||
|
easy to read:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A Markdown-formatted document should be publishable as-is, as
|
||||||
|
plain text, without looking like it’s been marked up with tags
|
||||||
|
or formatting instructions. – John Gruber
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This principle has guided pandoc’s decisions in finding syntax for
|
||||||
|
tables, footnotes, and other extensions.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
There is, however, one respect in which pandoc’s aims are different
|
||||||
|
from the original aims of Markdown. Whereas Markdown was originally
|
||||||
|
designed with HTML generation in mind, pandoc is designed for multiple
|
||||||
|
output formats. Thus, while pandoc allows the embedding of raw HTML,
|
||||||
|
it discourages it, and provides other, non-HTMLish ways of representing
|
||||||
|
important document elements like definition lists, tables, mathematics,
|
||||||
|
and footnotes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PPaarraaggrraapphhss
|
||||||
|
A paragraph is one or more lines of text followed by one or more blank
|
||||||
|
lines. Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your
|
||||||
|
paragraphs as you like. If you need a hard line break, put two or more
|
||||||
|
spaces at the end of a line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: eessccaappeedd__lliinnee__bbrreeaakkss
|
||||||
|
A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break. Note: in
|
||||||
|
multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way to create a hard
|
||||||
|
line break, since trailing spaces in the cells are ignored.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
HHeeaaddiinnggss
|
||||||
|
There are two kinds of headings: Setext and ATX.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSeetteexxtt--ssttyyllee hheeaaddiinnggss
|
||||||
|
A setext-style heading is a line of text “underlined” with a row of =
|
||||||
|
signs (for a level-one heading) or - signs (for a level-two heading):
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A level-one heading
|
||||||
|
===================
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A level-two heading
|
||||||
|
-------------------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The heading text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
|
||||||
|
Inline formatting, below).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
AATTXX--ssttyyllee hheeaaddiinnggss
|
||||||
|
An ATX-style heading consists of one to six # signs and a line of text,
|
||||||
|
optionally followed by any number of # signs. The number of # signs at
|
||||||
|
the beginning of the line is the heading level:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## A level-two heading
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### A level-three heading ###
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
As with setext-style headings, the heading text can contain formatting:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# A level-one heading with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: bbllaannkk__bbeeffoorree__hheeaaddeerr
|
||||||
|
Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a
|
||||||
|
heading. Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning
|
||||||
|
of the document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too
|
||||||
|
easy for a # to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
|
||||||
|
through line wrapping). Consider, for example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
|
||||||
|
#22, for example, and #5.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssppaaccee__iinn__aattxx__hheeaaddeerr
|
||||||
|
Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the
|
||||||
|
opening #s of an ATX heading and the heading text, so that #5 bolt and
|
||||||
|
#hashtag count as headings. With this extension, pandoc does require
|
||||||
|
the space.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
HHeeaaddiinngg iiddeennttiiffiieerrss
|
||||||
|
See also the auto_identifiers extension above.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: hheeaaddeerr__aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
Headings can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end of the
|
||||||
|
line containing the heading text:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{#identifier .class .class key=value key=value}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Thus, for example, the following headings will all be assigned the
|
||||||
|
identifier foo:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# My heading {#foo}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## My heading ## {#foo}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
My other heading {#foo}
|
||||||
|
---------------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(This syntax is compatible with PHP Markdown Extra.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that although this syntax allows assignment of classes and
|
||||||
|
key/value attributes, writers generally don’t use all of this
|
||||||
|
information. Identifiers, classes, and key/value attributes are used
|
||||||
|
in HTML and HTML-based formats such as EPUB and slidy. Identifiers are
|
||||||
|
used for labels and link anchors in the LaTeX, ConTeXt, Textile, Jira
|
||||||
|
markup, and AsciiDoc writers.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Headings with the class unnumbered will not be numbered, even if
|
||||||
|
--number-sections is specified. A single hyphen (-) in an attribute
|
||||||
|
context is equivalent to .unnumbered, and preferable in non-English
|
||||||
|
documents. So,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# My heading {-}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
is just the same as
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# My heading {.unnumbered}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the unlisted class is present in addition to unnumbered, the heading
|
||||||
|
will not be included in a table of contents. (Currently this feature
|
||||||
|
is only implemented for certain formats: those based on LaTeX and HTML,
|
||||||
|
PowerPoint, and RTF.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: iimmpplliicciitt__hheeaaddeerr__rreeffeerreenncceess
|
||||||
|
Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each
|
||||||
|
heading. So, to link to a heading
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Heading identifiers in HTML
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
you can simply write
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Heading identifiers in HTML]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
or
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Heading identifiers in HTML][]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
or
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[the section on heading identifiers][heading identifiers in
|
||||||
|
HTML]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
instead of giving the identifier explicitly:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Heading identifiers in HTML](#heading-identifiers-in-html)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If there are multiple headings with identical text, the corresponding
|
||||||
|
reference will link to the first one only, and you will need to use
|
||||||
|
explicit links to link to the others, as described above.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Like regular reference links, these references are case-insensitive.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Explicit link reference definitions always take priority over implicit
|
||||||
|
heading references. So, in the following example, the link will point
|
||||||
|
to bar, not to #foo:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Foo
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[foo]: bar
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See [foo]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
BBlloocckk qquuoottaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
Markdown uses email conventions for quoting blocks of text. A block
|
||||||
|
quotation is one or more paragraphs or other block elements (such as
|
||||||
|
lists or headings), with each line preceded by a > character and an
|
||||||
|
optional space. (The > need not start at the left margin, but it
|
||||||
|
should not be indented more than three spaces.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> This is a block quote. This
|
||||||
|
> paragraph has two lines.
|
||||||
|
>
|
||||||
|
> 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
|
||||||
|
> 2. Second item.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A “lazy” form, which requires the > character only on the first line of
|
||||||
|
each block, is also allowed:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> This is a block quote. This
|
||||||
|
paragraph has two lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
|
||||||
|
2. Second item.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Among the block elements that can be contained in a block quote are
|
||||||
|
other block quotes. That is, block quotes can be nested:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> This is a block quote.
|
||||||
|
>
|
||||||
|
> > A block quote within a block quote.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the > character is followed by an optional space, that space will be
|
||||||
|
considered part of the block quote marker and not part of the
|
||||||
|
indentation of the contents. Thus, to put an indented code block in a
|
||||||
|
block quote, you need five spaces after the >:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> code
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: bbllaannkk__bbeeffoorree__bblloocckkqquuoottee
|
||||||
|
Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a block
|
||||||
|
quote. Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning
|
||||||
|
of the document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too
|
||||||
|
easy for a > to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
|
||||||
|
through line wrapping). So, unless the markdown_strict format is used,
|
||||||
|
the following does not produce a nested block quote in pandoc:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> This is a block quote.
|
||||||
|
>> Nested.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVeerrbbaattiimm ((ccooddee)) bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
IInnddeenntteedd ccooddee bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
A block of text indented four spaces (or one tab) is treated as
|
||||||
|
verbatim text: that is, special characters do not trigger special
|
||||||
|
formatting, and all spaces and line breaks are preserved. For example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
if (a > 3) {
|
||||||
|
moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The initial (four space or one tab) indentation is not considered part
|
||||||
|
of the verbatim text, and is removed in the output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: blank lines in the verbatim text need not begin with four spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FFeenncceedd ccooddee bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ffeenncceedd__ccooddee__bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
In addition to standard indented code blocks, pandoc supports _f_e_n_c_e_d
|
||||||
|
code blocks. These begin with a row of three or more tildes (~) and
|
||||||
|
end with a row of tildes that must be at least as long as the starting
|
||||||
|
row. Everything between these lines is treated as code. No
|
||||||
|
indentation is necessary:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
if (a > 3) {
|
||||||
|
moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Like regular code blocks, fenced code blocks must be separated from
|
||||||
|
surrounding text by blank lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the code itself contains a row of tildes or backticks, just use a
|
||||||
|
longer row of tildes or backticks at the start and end:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
code including tildes
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: bbaacckkttiicckk__ccooddee__bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
Same as fenced_code_blocks, but uses backticks (`) instead of tildes
|
||||||
|
(~).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ffeenncceedd__ccooddee__aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
Optionally, you may attach attributes to fenced or backtick code block
|
||||||
|
using this syntax:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
~~~~ {#mycode .haskell .numberLines startFrom="100"}
|
||||||
|
qsort [] = []
|
||||||
|
qsort (x:xs) = qsort (filter (< x) xs) ++ [x] ++
|
||||||
|
qsort (filter (>= x) xs)
|
||||||
|
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here mycode is an identifier, haskell and numberLines are classes, and
|
||||||
|
startFrom is an attribute with value 100. Some output formats can use
|
||||||
|
this information to do syntax highlighting. Currently, the only output
|
||||||
|
formats that uses this information are HTML, LaTeX, Docx, Ms, and
|
||||||
|
PowerPoint. If highlighting is supported for your output format and
|
||||||
|
language, then the code block above will appear highlighted, with
|
||||||
|
numbered lines. (To see which languages are supported, type pandoc
|
||||||
|
--list-highlight-languages.) Otherwise, the code block above will
|
||||||
|
appear as follows:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<pre id="mycode" class="haskell numberLines" startFrom="100">
|
||||||
|
<code>
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
</code>
|
||||||
|
</pre>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The numberLines (or number-lines) class will cause the lines of the
|
||||||
|
code block to be numbered, starting with 1 or the value of the
|
||||||
|
startFrom attribute. The lineAnchors (or line-anchors) class will
|
||||||
|
cause the lines to be clickable anchors in HTML output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A shortcut form can also be used for specifying the language of the
|
||||||
|
code block:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```haskell
|
||||||
|
qsort [] = []
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is equivalent to:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
``` {.haskell}
|
||||||
|
qsort [] = []
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the fenced_code_attributes extension is disabled, but input contains
|
||||||
|
class attribute(s) for the code block, the first class attribute will
|
||||||
|
be printed after the opening fence as a bare word.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To prevent all highlighting, use the --no-highlight flag. To set the
|
||||||
|
highlighting style, use --highlight-style. For more information on
|
||||||
|
highlighting, see Syntax highlighting, below.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLiinnee bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: lliinnee__bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
A line block is a sequence of lines beginning with a vertical bar (|)
|
||||||
|
followed by a space. The division into lines will be preserved in the
|
||||||
|
output, as will any leading spaces; otherwise, the lines will be
|
||||||
|
formatted as Markdown. This is useful for verse and addresses:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| The limerick packs laughs anatomical
|
||||||
|
| In space that is quite economical.
|
||||||
|
| But the good ones I've seen
|
||||||
|
| So seldom are clean
|
||||||
|
| And the clean ones so seldom are comical
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| 200 Main St.
|
||||||
|
| Berkeley, CA 94718
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The lines can be hard-wrapped if needed, but the continuation line must
|
||||||
|
begin with a space.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| The Right Honorable Most Venerable and Righteous Samuel L.
|
||||||
|
Constable, Jr.
|
||||||
|
| 200 Main St.
|
||||||
|
| Berkeley, CA 94718
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Inline formatting (such as emphasis) is allowed in the content, but not
|
||||||
|
block-level formatting (such as block quotes or lists).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This syntax is borrowed from reStructuredText.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLiissttss
|
||||||
|
BBuulllleett lliissttss
|
||||||
|
A bullet list is a list of bulleted list items. A bulleted list item
|
||||||
|
begins with a bullet (*, +, or -). Here is a simple example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* one
|
||||||
|
* two
|
||||||
|
* three
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This will produce a “compact” list. If you want a “loose” list, in
|
||||||
|
which each item is formatted as a paragraph, put spaces between the
|
||||||
|
items:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* one
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* three
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The bullets need not be flush with the left margin; they may be
|
||||||
|
indented one, two, or three spaces. The bullet must be followed by
|
||||||
|
whitespace.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
List items look best if subsequent lines are flush with the first line
|
||||||
|
(after the bullet):
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* here is my first
|
||||||
|
list item.
|
||||||
|
* and my second.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
But Markdown also allows a “lazy” format:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* here is my first
|
||||||
|
list item.
|
||||||
|
* and my second.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
BBlloocckk ccoonntteenntt iinn lliisstt iitteemmss
|
||||||
|
A list item may contain multiple paragraphs and other block-level
|
||||||
|
content. However, subsequent paragraphs must be preceded by a blank
|
||||||
|
line and indented to line up with the first non-space content after the
|
||||||
|
list marker.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* First paragraph.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Continued.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* Second paragraph. With a code block, which must be indented
|
||||||
|
eight spaces:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{ code }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Exception: if the list marker is followed by an indented code block,
|
||||||
|
which must begin 5 spaces after the list marker, then subsequent
|
||||||
|
paragraphs must begin two columns after the last character of the list
|
||||||
|
marker:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* code
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
continuation paragraph
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
List items may include other lists. In this case the preceding blank
|
||||||
|
line is optional. The nested list must be indented to line up with the
|
||||||
|
first non-space character after the list marker of the containing list
|
||||||
|
item.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* fruits
|
||||||
|
+ apples
|
||||||
|
- macintosh
|
||||||
|
- red delicious
|
||||||
|
+ pears
|
||||||
|
+ peaches
|
||||||
|
* vegetables
|
||||||
|
+ broccoli
|
||||||
|
+ chard
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
As noted above, Markdown allows you to write list items “lazily,”
|
||||||
|
instead of indenting continuation lines. However, if there are
|
||||||
|
multiple paragraphs or other blocks in a list item, the first line of
|
||||||
|
each must be indented.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
+ A lazy, lazy, list
|
||||||
|
item.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
+ Another one; this looks
|
||||||
|
bad but is legal.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Second paragraph of second
|
||||||
|
list item.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOrrddeerreedd lliissttss
|
||||||
|
Ordered lists work just like bulleted lists, except that the items
|
||||||
|
begin with enumerators rather than bullets.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In standard Markdown, enumerators are decimal numbers followed by a
|
||||||
|
period and a space. The numbers themselves are ignored, so there is no
|
||||||
|
difference between this list:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. one
|
||||||
|
2. two
|
||||||
|
3. three
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
and this one:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
5. one
|
||||||
|
7. two
|
||||||
|
1. three
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ffaannccyy__lliissttss
|
||||||
|
Unlike standard Markdown, pandoc allows ordered list items to be marked
|
||||||
|
with uppercase and lowercase letters and roman numerals, in addition to
|
||||||
|
Arabic numerals. List markers may be enclosed in parentheses or
|
||||||
|
followed by a single right-parentheses or period. They must be
|
||||||
|
separated from the text that follows by at least one space, and, if the
|
||||||
|
list marker is a capital letter with a period, by at least two spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The fancy_lists extension also allows `#' to be used as an ordered list
|
||||||
|
marker in place of a numeral:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#. one
|
||||||
|
#. two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssttaarrttnnuumm
|
||||||
|
Pandoc also pays attention to the type of list marker used, and to the
|
||||||
|
starting number, and both of these are preserved where possible in the
|
||||||
|
output format. Thus, the following yields a list with numbers followed
|
||||||
|
by a single parenthesis, starting with 9, and a sublist with lowercase
|
||||||
|
roman numerals:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
9) Ninth
|
||||||
|
10) Tenth
|
||||||
|
11) Eleventh
|
||||||
|
i. subone
|
||||||
|
ii. subtwo
|
||||||
|
iii. subthree
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc will start a new list each time a different type of list marker
|
||||||
|
is used. So, the following will create three lists:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(2) Two
|
||||||
|
(5) Three
|
||||||
|
1. Four
|
||||||
|
* Five
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If default list markers are desired, use #.:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
#. one
|
||||||
|
#. two
|
||||||
|
#. three
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ttaasskk__lliissttss
|
||||||
|
Pandoc supports task lists, using the syntax of GitHub-Flavored
|
||||||
|
Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- [ ] an unchecked task list item
|
||||||
|
- [x] checked item
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
DDeeffiinniittiioonn lliissttss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ddeeffiinniittiioonn__lliissttss
|
||||||
|
Pandoc supports definition lists, using the syntax of PHP Markdown
|
||||||
|
Extra with some extensions.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Term 1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
: Definition 1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Term 2 with *inline markup*
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
: Definition 2
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{ some code, part of Definition 2 }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Third paragraph of definition 2.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Each term must fit on one line, which may optionally be followed by a
|
||||||
|
blank line, and must be followed by one or more definitions. A
|
||||||
|
definition begins with a colon or tilde, which may be indented one or
|
||||||
|
two spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A term may have multiple definitions, and each definition may consist
|
||||||
|
of one or more block elements (paragraph, code block, list, etc.), each
|
||||||
|
indented four spaces or one tab stop. The body of the definition
|
||||||
|
(including the first line, aside from the colon or tilde) should be
|
||||||
|
indented four spaces. However, as with other Markdown lists, you can
|
||||||
|
“lazily” omit indentation except at the beginning of a paragraph or
|
||||||
|
other block element:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Term 1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
: Definition
|
||||||
|
with lazy continuation.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Second paragraph of the definition.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you leave space before the definition (as in the example above), the
|
||||||
|
text of the definition will be treated as a paragraph. In some output
|
||||||
|
formats, this will mean greater spacing between term/definition pairs.
|
||||||
|
For a more compact definition list, omit the space before the
|
||||||
|
definition:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Term 1
|
||||||
|
~ Definition 1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Term 2
|
||||||
|
~ Definition 2a
|
||||||
|
~ Definition 2b
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that space between items in a definition list is required. (A
|
||||||
|
variant that loosens this requirement, but disallows “lazy” hard
|
||||||
|
wrapping, can be activated with compact_definition_lists: see Non-
|
||||||
|
default extensions, below.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
NNuummbbeerreedd eexxaammppllee lliissttss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: eexxaammppllee__lliissttss
|
||||||
|
The special list marker @ can be used for sequentially numbered
|
||||||
|
examples. The first list item with a @ marker will be numbered `1',
|
||||||
|
the next `2', and so on, throughout the document. The numbered
|
||||||
|
examples need not occur in a single list; each new list using @ will
|
||||||
|
take up where the last stopped. So, for example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(@) My first example will be numbered (1).
|
||||||
|
(@) My second example will be numbered (2).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Explanation of examples.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(@) My third example will be numbered (3).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Numbered examples can be labeled and referred to elsewhere in the
|
||||||
|
document:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(@good) This is a good example.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
As (@good) illustrates, ...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The label can be any string of alphanumeric characters, underscores, or
|
||||||
|
hyphens.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: continuation paragraphs in example lists must always be indented
|
||||||
|
four spaces, regardless of the length of the list marker. That is,
|
||||||
|
example lists always behave as if the four_space_rule extension is set.
|
||||||
|
This is because example labels tend to be long, and indenting content
|
||||||
|
to the first non-space character after the label would be awkward.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EEnnddiinngg aa lliisstt
|
||||||
|
What if you want to put an indented code block after a list?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- item one
|
||||||
|
- item two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{ my code block }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Trouble! Here pandoc (like other Markdown implementations) will treat {
|
||||||
|
my code block } as the second paragraph of item two, and not as a code
|
||||||
|
block.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To “cut off” the list after item two, you can insert some non-indented
|
||||||
|
content, like an HTML comment, which won’t produce visible output in
|
||||||
|
any format:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- item one
|
||||||
|
- item two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<!-- end of list -->
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{ my code block }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
You can use the same trick if you want two consecutive lists instead of
|
||||||
|
one big list:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. one
|
||||||
|
2. two
|
||||||
|
3. three
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<!-- -->
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. uno
|
||||||
|
2. dos
|
||||||
|
3. tres
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
HHoorriizzoonnttaall rruulleess
|
||||||
|
A line containing a row of three or more *, -, or _ characters
|
||||||
|
(optionally separated by spaces) produces a horizontal rule:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* * * *
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---------------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
TTaabblleess
|
||||||
|
Four kinds of tables may be used. The first three kinds presuppose the
|
||||||
|
use of a fixed-width font, such as Courier. The fourth kind can be
|
||||||
|
used with proportionally spaced fonts, as it does not require lining up
|
||||||
|
columns.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ttaabbllee__ccaappttiioonnss
|
||||||
|
A caption may optionally be provided with all 4 kinds of tables (as
|
||||||
|
illustrated in the examples below). A caption is a paragraph beginning
|
||||||
|
with the string Table: (or just :), which will be stripped off. It may
|
||||||
|
appear either before or after the table.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssiimmppllee__ttaabblleess
|
||||||
|
Simple tables look like this:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Right Left Center Default
|
||||||
|
------- ------ ---------- -------
|
||||||
|
12 12 12 12
|
||||||
|
123 123 123 123
|
||||||
|
1 1 1 1
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Table: Demonstration of simple table syntax.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The header and table rows must each fit on one line. Column alignments
|
||||||
|
are determined by the position of the header text relative to the
|
||||||
|
dashed line below it:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the right side
|
||||||
|
but extends beyond it on the left, the column is right-aligned.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the left side but
|
||||||
|
extends beyond it on the right, the column is left-aligned.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the dashed line extends beyond the header text on both sides, the
|
||||||
|
column is centered.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• If the dashed line is flush with the header text on both sides, the
|
||||||
|
default alignment is used (in most cases, this will be left).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The table must end with a blank line, or a line of dashes followed by a
|
||||||
|
blank line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The column header row may be omitted, provided a dashed line is used to
|
||||||
|
end the table. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
------- ------ ---------- -------
|
||||||
|
12 12 12 12
|
||||||
|
123 123 123 123
|
||||||
|
1 1 1 1
|
||||||
|
------- ------ ---------- -------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When the header row is omitted, column alignments are determined on the
|
||||||
|
basis of the first line of the table body. So, in the tables above,
|
||||||
|
the columns would be right, left, center, and right aligned,
|
||||||
|
respectively.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: mmuullttiilliinnee__ttaabblleess
|
||||||
|
Multiline tables allow header and table rows to span multiple lines of
|
||||||
|
text (but cells that span multiple columns or rows of the table are not
|
||||||
|
supported). Here is an example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||||
|
Centered Default Right Left
|
||||||
|
Header Aligned Aligned Aligned
|
||||||
|
----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
|
||||||
|
First row 12.0 Example of a row that
|
||||||
|
spans multiple lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Second row 5.0 Here's another one. Note
|
||||||
|
the blank line between
|
||||||
|
rows.
|
||||||
|
-------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Table: Here's the caption. It, too, may span
|
||||||
|
multiple lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
These work like simple tables, but with the following differences:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• They must begin with a row of dashes, before the header text (unless
|
||||||
|
the header row is omitted).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• They must end with a row of dashes, then a blank line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• The rows must be separated by blank lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In multiline tables, the table parser pays attention to the widths of
|
||||||
|
the columns, and the writers try to reproduce these relative widths in
|
||||||
|
the output. So, if you find that one of the columns is too narrow in
|
||||||
|
the output, try widening it in the Markdown source.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The header may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
|
||||||
|
First row 12.0 Example of a row that
|
||||||
|
spans multiple lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Second row 5.0 Here's another one. Note
|
||||||
|
the blank line between
|
||||||
|
rows.
|
||||||
|
----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
: Here's a multiline table without a header.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
It is possible for a multiline table to have just one row, but the row
|
||||||
|
should be followed by a blank line (and then the row of dashes that
|
||||||
|
ends the table), or the table may be interpreted as a simple table.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ggrriidd__ttaabblleess
|
||||||
|
Grid tables look like this:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
: Sample grid table.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
+---------------+---------------+--------------------+
|
||||||
|
| Fruit | Price | Advantages |
|
||||||
|
+===============+===============+====================+
|
||||||
|
| Bananas | $1.34 | - built-in wrapper |
|
||||||
|
| | | - bright color |
|
||||||
|
+---------------+---------------+--------------------+
|
||||||
|
| Oranges | $2.10 | - cures scurvy |
|
||||||
|
| | | - tasty |
|
||||||
|
+---------------+---------------+--------------------+
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The row of =s separates the header from the table body, and can be
|
||||||
|
omitted for a headerless table. The cells of grid tables may contain
|
||||||
|
arbitrary block elements (multiple paragraphs, code blocks, lists,
|
||||||
|
etc.). Cells that span multiple columns or rows are not supported.
|
||||||
|
Grid tables can be created easily using Emacs’ table-mode (M-x
|
||||||
|
table-insert).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Alignments can be specified as with pipe tables, by putting colons at
|
||||||
|
the boundaries of the separator line after the header:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
+---------------+---------------+--------------------+
|
||||||
|
| Right | Left | Centered |
|
||||||
|
+==============:+:==============+:==================:+
|
||||||
|
| Bananas | $1.34 | built-in wrapper |
|
||||||
|
+---------------+---------------+--------------------+
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For headerless tables, the colons go on the top line instead:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
+--------------:+:--------------+:------------------:+
|
||||||
|
| Right | Left | Centered |
|
||||||
|
+---------------+---------------+--------------------+
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
GGrriidd TTaabbllee LLiimmiittaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
Pandoc does not support grid tables with row spans or column spans.
|
||||||
|
This means that neither variable numbers of columns across rows nor
|
||||||
|
variable numbers of rows across columns are supported by Pandoc. All
|
||||||
|
grid tables must have the same number of columns in each row, and the
|
||||||
|
same number of rows in each column. For example, the Docutils sample
|
||||||
|
grid tables will not render as expected with Pandoc.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ppiippee__ttaabblleess
|
||||||
|
Pipe tables look like this:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| Right | Left | Default | Center |
|
||||||
|
|------:|:-----|---------|:------:|
|
||||||
|
| 12 | 12 | 12 | 12 |
|
||||||
|
| 123 | 123 | 123 | 123 |
|
||||||
|
| 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
: Demonstration of pipe table syntax.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The syntax is identical to PHP Markdown Extra tables. The beginning
|
||||||
|
and ending pipe characters are optional, but pipes are required between
|
||||||
|
all columns. The colons indicate column alignment as shown. The
|
||||||
|
header cannot be omitted. To simulate a headerless table, include a
|
||||||
|
header with blank cells.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Since the pipes indicate column boundaries, columns need not be
|
||||||
|
vertically aligned, as they are in the above example. So, this is a
|
||||||
|
perfectly legal (though ugly) pipe table:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
fruit| price
|
||||||
|
-----|-----:
|
||||||
|
apple|2.05
|
||||||
|
pear|1.37
|
||||||
|
orange|3.09
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The cells of pipe tables cannot contain block elements like paragraphs
|
||||||
|
and lists, and cannot span multiple lines. If a pipe table contains a
|
||||||
|
row whose Markdown content is wider than the column width (see
|
||||||
|
--columns), then the table will take up the full text width and the
|
||||||
|
cell contents will wrap, with the relative cell widths determined by
|
||||||
|
the number of dashes in the line separating the table header from the
|
||||||
|
table body. (For example ---|- would make the first column 3/4 and the
|
||||||
|
second column 1/4 of the full text width.) On the other hand, if no
|
||||||
|
lines are wider than column width, then cell contents will not be
|
||||||
|
wrapped, and the cells will be sized to their contents.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: pandoc also recognizes pipe tables of the following form, as can
|
||||||
|
be produced by Emacs’ orgtbl-mode:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| One | Two |
|
||||||
|
|-----+-------|
|
||||||
|
| my | table |
|
||||||
|
| is | nice |
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The difference is that + is used instead of |. Other orgtbl features
|
||||||
|
are not supported. In particular, to get non-default column alignment,
|
||||||
|
you’ll need to add colons as above.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
MMeettaaddaattaa bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ppaannddoocc__ttiittllee__bblloocckk
|
||||||
|
If the file begins with a title block
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% title
|
||||||
|
% author(s) (separated by semicolons)
|
||||||
|
% date
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
it will be parsed as bibliographic information, not regular text. (It
|
||||||
|
will be used, for example, in the title of standalone LaTeX or HTML
|
||||||
|
output.) The block may contain just a title, a title and an author, or
|
||||||
|
all three elements. If you want to include an author but no title, or
|
||||||
|
a title and a date but no author, you need a blank line:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
%
|
||||||
|
% Author
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% My title
|
||||||
|
%
|
||||||
|
% June 15, 2006
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The title may occupy multiple lines, but continuation lines must begin
|
||||||
|
with leading space, thus:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% My title
|
||||||
|
on multiple lines
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If a document has multiple authors, the authors may be put on separate
|
||||||
|
lines with leading space, or separated by semicolons, or both. So, all
|
||||||
|
of the following are equivalent:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% Author One
|
||||||
|
Author Two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% Author One; Author Two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% Author One;
|
||||||
|
Author Two
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The date must fit on one line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
All three metadata fields may contain standard inline formatting
|
||||||
|
(italics, links, footnotes, etc.).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Title blocks will always be parsed, but they will affect the output
|
||||||
|
only when the --standalone (-s) option is chosen. In HTML output,
|
||||||
|
titles will appear twice: once in the document head – this is the title
|
||||||
|
that will appear at the top of the window in a browser – and once at
|
||||||
|
the beginning of the document body. The title in the document head can
|
||||||
|
have an optional prefix attached (--title-prefix or -T option). The
|
||||||
|
title in the body appears as an H1 element with class “title”, so it
|
||||||
|
can be suppressed or reformatted with CSS. If a title prefix is
|
||||||
|
specified with -T and no title block appears in the document, the title
|
||||||
|
prefix will be used by itself as the HTML title.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The man page writer extracts a title, man page section number, and
|
||||||
|
other header and footer information from the title line. The title is
|
||||||
|
assumed to be the first word on the title line, which may optionally
|
||||||
|
end with a (single-digit) section number in parentheses. (There should
|
||||||
|
be no space between the title and the parentheses.) Anything after
|
||||||
|
this is assumed to be additional footer and header text. A single pipe
|
||||||
|
character (|) should be used to separate the footer text from the
|
||||||
|
header text. Thus,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% PANDOC(1)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
will yield a man page with the title PANDOC and section 1.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
will also have “Pandoc User Manuals” in the footer.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals | Version 4.0
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
will also have “Version 4.0” in the header.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: yyaammll__mmeettaaddaattaa__bblloocckk
|
||||||
|
A YAML metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of
|
||||||
|
three hyphens (---) at the top and a line of three hyphens (---) or
|
||||||
|
three dots (...) at the bottom. A YAML metadata block may occur
|
||||||
|
anywhere in the document, but if it is not at the beginning, it must be
|
||||||
|
preceded by a blank line. (Note that, because of the way pandoc
|
||||||
|
concatenates input files when several are provided, you may also keep
|
||||||
|
the metadata in a separate YAML file and pass it to pandoc as an
|
||||||
|
argument, along with your Markdown files:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc chap1.md chap2.md chap3.md metadata.yaml -s -o book.html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Just be sure that the YAML file begins with --- and ends with --- or
|
||||||
|
....) Alternatively, you can use the --metadata-file option. Using
|
||||||
|
that approach however, you cannot reference content (like footnotes)
|
||||||
|
from the main markdown input document.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Metadata will be taken from the fields of the YAML object and added to
|
||||||
|
any existing document metadata. Metadata can contain lists and objects
|
||||||
|
(nested arbitrarily), but all string scalars will be interpreted as
|
||||||
|
Markdown. Fields with names ending in an underscore will be ignored by
|
||||||
|
pandoc. (They may be given a role by external processors.) Field names
|
||||||
|
must not be interpretable as YAML numbers or boolean values (so, for
|
||||||
|
example, yes, True, and 15 cannot be used as field names).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A document may contain multiple metadata blocks. If two metadata
|
||||||
|
blocks attempt to set the same field, the value from the second block
|
||||||
|
will be taken.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When pandoc is used with -t markdown to create a Markdown document, a
|
||||||
|
YAML metadata block will be produced only if the -s/--standalone option
|
||||||
|
is used. All of the metadata will appear in a single block at the
|
||||||
|
beginning of the document.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that YAML escaping rules must be followed. Thus, for example, if
|
||||||
|
a title contains a colon, it must be quoted, and if it contains a
|
||||||
|
backslash escape, then it must be ensured that it is not treated as a
|
||||||
|
YAML escape sequence. The pipe character (|) can be used to begin an
|
||||||
|
indented block that will be interpreted literally, without need for
|
||||||
|
escaping. This form is necessary when the field contains blank lines
|
||||||
|
or block-level formatting:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
title: 'This is the title: it contains a colon'
|
||||||
|
author:
|
||||||
|
- Author One
|
||||||
|
- Author Two
|
||||||
|
keywords: [nothing, nothingness]
|
||||||
|
abstract: |
|
||||||
|
This is the abstract.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
It consists of two paragraphs.
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The literal block after the | must be indented relative to the line
|
||||||
|
containing the |. If it is not, the YAML will be invalid and pandoc
|
||||||
|
will not interpret it as metadata. For an overview of the complex
|
||||||
|
rules governing YAML, see the Wikipedia entry on YAML syntax.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Template variables will be set automatically from the metadata. Thus,
|
||||||
|
for example, in writing HTML, the variable abstract will be set to the
|
||||||
|
HTML equivalent of the Markdown in the abstract field:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>This is the abstract.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>It consists of two paragraphs.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Variables can contain arbitrary YAML structures, but the template must
|
||||||
|
match this structure. The author variable in the default templates
|
||||||
|
expects a simple list or string, but can be changed to support more
|
||||||
|
complicated structures. The following combination, for example, would
|
||||||
|
add an affiliation to the author if one is given:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
title: The document title
|
||||||
|
author:
|
||||||
|
- name: Author One
|
||||||
|
affiliation: University of Somewhere
|
||||||
|
- name: Author Two
|
||||||
|
affiliation: University of Nowhere
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To use the structured authors in the example above, you would need a
|
||||||
|
custom template:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$for(author)$
|
||||||
|
$if(author.name)$
|
||||||
|
$author.name$$if(author.affiliation)$ ($author.affiliation$)$endif$
|
||||||
|
$else$
|
||||||
|
$author$
|
||||||
|
$endif$
|
||||||
|
$endfor$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Raw content to include in the document’s header may be specified using
|
||||||
|
header-includes; however, it is important to mark up this content as
|
||||||
|
raw code for a particular output format, using the raw_attribute
|
||||||
|
extension), or it will be interpreted as markdown. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
header-includes:
|
||||||
|
- |
|
||||||
|
```{=latex}
|
||||||
|
\let\oldsection\section
|
||||||
|
\renewcommand{\section}[1]{\clearpage\oldsection{#1}}
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: the yaml_metadata_block extension works with commonmark as well
|
||||||
|
as markdown (and it is enabled by default in gfm and commonmark_x).
|
||||||
|
However, in these formats the following restrictions apply:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• The YAML metadata block must occur at the beginning of the document
|
||||||
|
(and there can be only one). If multiple files are given as
|
||||||
|
arguments to pandoc, only the first can be a YAML metadata block.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• The leaf nodes of the YAML structure are parsed in isolation from
|
||||||
|
each other and from the rest of the document. So, for example, you
|
||||||
|
can’t use a reference link in these contexts if the link definition
|
||||||
|
is somewhere else in the document.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
BBaacckkssllaasshh eessccaappeess
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aallll__ssyymmbboollss__eessccaappaabbllee
|
||||||
|
Except inside a code block or inline code, any punctuation or space
|
||||||
|
character preceded by a backslash will be treated literally, even if it
|
||||||
|
would normally indicate formatting. Thus, for example, if one writes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*\*hello\**
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
one will get
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<em>*hello*</em>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
instead of
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<strong>hello</strong>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This rule is easier to remember than standard Markdown’s rule, which
|
||||||
|
allows only the following characters to be backslash-escaped:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\`*_{}[]()>#+-.!
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(However, if the markdown_strict format is used, the standard Markdown
|
||||||
|
rule will be used.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space. In TeX
|
||||||
|
output, it will appear as ~. In HTML and XML output, it will appear as
|
||||||
|
a literal unicode nonbreaking space character (note that it will thus
|
||||||
|
actually look “invisible” in the generated HTML source; you can still
|
||||||
|
use the --ascii command-line option to make it appear as an explicit
|
||||||
|
entity).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A backslash-escaped newline (i.e. a backslash occurring at the end of a
|
||||||
|
line) is parsed as a hard line break. It will appear in TeX output as
|
||||||
|
\\ and in HTML as <br />. This is a nice alternative to Markdown’s
|
||||||
|
“invisible” way of indicating hard line breaks using two trailing
|
||||||
|
spaces on a line.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Backslash escapes do not work in verbatim contexts.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInnlliinnee ffoorrmmaattttiinngg
|
||||||
|
EEmmpphhaassiiss
|
||||||
|
To _e_m_p_h_a_s_i_z_e some text, surround it with *s or _, like this:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This text is _emphasized with underscores_, and this
|
||||||
|
is *emphasized with asterisks*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Double * or _ produces ssttrroonngg eemmpphhaassiiss:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is **strong emphasis** and __with underscores__.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A * or _ character surrounded by spaces, or backslash-escaped, will not
|
||||||
|
trigger emphasis:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is * not emphasized *, and \*neither is this\*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: iinnttrraawwoorrdd__uunnddeerrssccoorreess
|
||||||
|
Because _ is sometimes used inside words and identifiers, pandoc does
|
||||||
|
not interpret a _ surrounded by alphanumeric characters as an emphasis
|
||||||
|
marker. If you want to emphasize just part of a word, use *:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
feas*ible*, not feas*able*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSttrriikkeeoouutt
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssttrriikkeeoouutt
|
||||||
|
To strikeout a section of text with a horizontal line, begin and end it
|
||||||
|
with ~~. Thus, for example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This ~~is deleted text.~~
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSuuppeerrssccrriippttss aanndd ssuubbssccrriippttss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssuuppeerrssccrriipptt, subscript
|
||||||
|
Superscripts may be written by surrounding the superscripted text by ^
|
||||||
|
characters; subscripts may be written by surrounding the subscripted
|
||||||
|
text by ~ characters. Thus, for example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
H~2~O is a liquid. 2^10^ is 1024.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The text between ^...^ or ~...~ may not contain spaces or newlines. If
|
||||||
|
the superscripted or subscripted text contains spaces, these spaces
|
||||||
|
must be escaped with backslashes. (This is to prevent accidental
|
||||||
|
superscripting and subscripting through the ordinary use of ~ and ^,
|
||||||
|
and also bad interactions with footnotes.) Thus, if you want the letter
|
||||||
|
P with `a cat' in subscripts, use P~a\ cat~, not P~a cat~.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
VVeerrbbaattiimm
|
||||||
|
To make a short span of text verbatim, put it inside backticks:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
What is the difference between `>>=` and `>>`?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If the verbatim text includes a backtick, use double backticks:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here is a literal backtick `` ` ``.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(The spaces after the opening backticks and before the closing
|
||||||
|
backticks will be ignored.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The general rule is that a verbatim span starts with a string of
|
||||||
|
consecutive backticks (optionally followed by a space) and ends with a
|
||||||
|
string of the same number of backticks (optionally preceded by a
|
||||||
|
space).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that backslash-escapes (and other Markdown constructs) do not work
|
||||||
|
in verbatim contexts:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is a backslash followed by an asterisk: `\*`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: iinnlliinnee__ccooddee__aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
Attributes can be attached to verbatim text, just as with fenced code
|
||||||
|
blocks:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`<$>`{.haskell}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSmmaallll ccaappss
|
||||||
|
To write small caps, use the smallcaps class:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Small caps]{.smallcaps}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Or, without the bracketed_spans extension:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<span class="smallcaps">Small caps</span>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For compatibility with other Markdown flavors, CSS is also supported:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<span style="font-variant:small-caps;">Small caps</span>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
MMaatthh
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: tteexx__mmaatthh__ddoollllaarrss
|
||||||
|
Anything between two $ characters will be treated as TeX math. The
|
||||||
|
opening $ must have a non-space character immediately to its right,
|
||||||
|
while the closing $ must have a non-space character immediately to its
|
||||||
|
left, and must not be followed immediately by a digit. Thus, $20,000
|
||||||
|
and $30,000 won’t parse as math. If for some reason you need to
|
||||||
|
enclose text in literal $ characters, backslash-escape them and they
|
||||||
|
won’t be treated as math delimiters.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For display math, use $$ delimiters. (In this case, the delimiters may
|
||||||
|
be separated from the formula by whitespace. However, there can be no
|
||||||
|
blank lines betwen the opening and closing $$ delimiters.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
TeX math will be printed in all output formats. How it is rendered
|
||||||
|
depends on the output format:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LaTeX It will appear verbatim surrounded by \(...\) (for inline math)
|
||||||
|
or \[...\] (for display math).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Markdown, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
|
||||||
|
It will appear verbatim surrounded by $...$ (for inline math) or
|
||||||
|
$$...$$ (for display math).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
XWiki It will appear verbatim surrounded by {{formula}}..{{/formula}}.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
reStructuredText
|
||||||
|
It will be rendered using an interpreted text role :math:.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
AsciiDoc
|
||||||
|
For AsciiDoc output format (-t asciidoc) it will appear verbatim
|
||||||
|
surrounded by latexmath:[$...$] (for inline math) or
|
||||||
|
[latexmath]++++\[...\]+++ (for display math). For AsciiDoctor
|
||||||
|
output format (-t asciidoctor) the LaTex delimiters ($..$ and
|
||||||
|
\[..\]) are omitted.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Texinfo
|
||||||
|
It will be rendered inside a @math command.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
roff man, Jira markup
|
||||||
|
It will be rendered verbatim without $’s.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
MediaWiki, DokuWiki
|
||||||
|
It will be rendered inside <math> tags.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Textile
|
||||||
|
It will be rendered inside <span class="math"> tags.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RTF, OpenDocument
|
||||||
|
It will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters, and
|
||||||
|
will otherwise appear verbatim.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ODT It will be rendered, if possible, using MathML.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
DocBook
|
||||||
|
If the --mathml flag is used, it will be rendered using MathML
|
||||||
|
in an inlineequation or informalequation tag. Otherwise it will
|
||||||
|
be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Docx It will be rendered using OMML math markup.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FictionBook2
|
||||||
|
If the --webtex option is used, formulas are rendered as images
|
||||||
|
using CodeCogs or other compatible web service, downloaded and
|
||||||
|
embedded in the e-book. Otherwise, they will appear verbatim.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
HTML, Slidy, DZSlides, S5, EPUB
|
||||||
|
The way math is rendered in HTML will depend on the command-line
|
||||||
|
options selected. Therefore see Math rendering in HTML above.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RRaaww HHTTMMLL
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: rraaww__hhttmmll
|
||||||
|
Markdown allows you to insert raw HTML (or DocBook) anywhere in a
|
||||||
|
document (except verbatim contexts, where <, >, and & are interpreted
|
||||||
|
literally). (Technically this is not an extension, since standard
|
||||||
|
Markdown allows it, but it has been made an extension so that it can be
|
||||||
|
disabled if desired.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The raw HTML is passed through unchanged in HTML, S5, Slidy, Slideous,
|
||||||
|
DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, CommonMark, Emacs Org mode, and Textile
|
||||||
|
output, and suppressed in other formats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For a more explicit way of including raw HTML in a Markdown document,
|
||||||
|
see the raw_attribute extension.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In the CommonMark format, if raw_html is enabled, superscripts,
|
||||||
|
subscripts, strikeouts and small capitals will be represented as HTML.
|
||||||
|
Otherwise, plain-text fallbacks will be used. Note that even if
|
||||||
|
raw_html is disabled, tables will be rendered with HTML syntax if they
|
||||||
|
cannot use pipe syntax.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: mmaarrkkddoowwnn__iinn__hhttmmll__bblloocckkss
|
||||||
|
Standard Markdown allows you to include HTML “blocks”: blocks of HTML
|
||||||
|
between balanced tags that are separated from the surrounding text with
|
||||||
|
blank lines, and start and end at the left margin. Within these
|
||||||
|
blocks, everything is interpreted as HTML, not Markdown; so (for
|
||||||
|
example), * does not signify emphasis.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc behaves this way when the markdown_strict format is used; but by
|
||||||
|
default, pandoc interprets material between HTML block tags as
|
||||||
|
Markdown. Thus, for example, pandoc will turn
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table>
|
||||||
|
<tr>
|
||||||
|
<td>*one*</td>
|
||||||
|
<td>[a link](https://google.com)</td>
|
||||||
|
</tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
into
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table>
|
||||||
|
<tr>
|
||||||
|
<td><em>one</em></td>
|
||||||
|
<td><a href="https://google.com">a link</a></td>
|
||||||
|
</tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
whereas Markdown.pl will preserve it as is.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
There is one exception to this rule: text between <script>, <style>,
|
||||||
|
and <textarea> tags is not interpreted as Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This departure from standard Markdown should make it easier to mix
|
||||||
|
Markdown with HTML block elements. For example, one can surround a
|
||||||
|
block of Markdown text with <div> tags without preventing it from being
|
||||||
|
interpreted as Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: nnaattiivvee__ddiivvss
|
||||||
|
Use native pandoc Div blocks for content inside <div> tags. For the
|
||||||
|
most part this should give the same output as markdown_in_html_blocks,
|
||||||
|
but it makes it easier to write pandoc filters to manipulate groups of
|
||||||
|
blocks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: nnaattiivvee__ssppaannss
|
||||||
|
Use native pandoc Span blocks for content inside <span> tags. For the
|
||||||
|
most part this should give the same output as raw_html, but it makes it
|
||||||
|
easier to write pandoc filters to manipulate groups of inlines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: rraaww__tteexx
|
||||||
|
In addition to raw HTML, pandoc allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to
|
||||||
|
be included in a document. Inline TeX commands will be preserved and
|
||||||
|
passed unchanged to the LaTeX and ConTeXt writers. Thus, for example,
|
||||||
|
you can use LaTeX to include BibTeX citations:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This result was proved in \cite{jones.1967}.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that in LaTeX environments, like
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}\hline
|
||||||
|
Age & Frequency \\ \hline
|
||||||
|
18--25 & 15 \\
|
||||||
|
26--35 & 33 \\
|
||||||
|
36--45 & 22 \\ \hline
|
||||||
|
\end{tabular}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
the material between the begin and end tags will be interpreted as raw
|
||||||
|
LaTeX, not as Markdown.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For a more explicit and flexible way of including raw TeX in a Markdown
|
||||||
|
document, see the raw_attribute extension.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Inline LaTeX is ignored in output formats other than Markdown, LaTeX,
|
||||||
|
Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
GGeenneerriicc rraaww aattttrriibbuuttee
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: rraaww__aattttrriibbuuttee
|
||||||
|
Inline spans and fenced code blocks with a special kind of attribute
|
||||||
|
will be parsed as raw content with the designated format. For example,
|
||||||
|
the following produces a raw roff ms block:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```{=ms}
|
||||||
|
.MYMACRO
|
||||||
|
blah blah
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
And the following produces a raw html inline element:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is `<a>html</a>`{=html}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This can be useful to insert raw xml into docx documents, e.g. a
|
||||||
|
pagebreak:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```{=openxml}
|
||||||
|
<w:p>
|
||||||
|
<w:r>
|
||||||
|
<w:br w:type="page"/>
|
||||||
|
</w:r>
|
||||||
|
</w:p>
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The format name should match the target format name (see -t/--to,
|
||||||
|
above, for a list, or use pandoc --list-output-formats). Use openxml
|
||||||
|
for docx output, opendocument for odt output, html5 for epub3 output,
|
||||||
|
html4 for epub2 output, and latex, beamer, ms, or html5 for pdf output
|
||||||
|
(depending on what you use for --pdf-engine).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This extension presupposes that the relevant kind of inline code or
|
||||||
|
fenced code block is enabled. Thus, for example, to use a raw
|
||||||
|
attribute with a backtick code block, backtick_code_blocks must be
|
||||||
|
enabled.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The raw attribute cannot be combined with regular attributes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLaaTTeeXX mmaaccrrooss
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: llaatteexx__mmaaccrrooss
|
||||||
|
When this extension is enabled, pandoc will parse LaTeX macro
|
||||||
|
definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX math and raw
|
||||||
|
LaTeX. So, for example, the following will work in all output formats,
|
||||||
|
not just LaTeX:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\newcommand{\tuple}[1]{\langle #1 \rangle}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$\tuple{a, b, c}$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that LaTeX macros will not be applied if they occur inside a raw
|
||||||
|
span or block marked with the raw_attribute extension.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When latex_macros is disabled, the raw LaTeX and math will not have
|
||||||
|
macros applied. This is usually a better approach when you are
|
||||||
|
targeting LaTeX or PDF.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Macro definitions in LaTeX will be passed through as raw LaTeX only if
|
||||||
|
latex_macros is not enabled. Macro definitions in Markdown source (or
|
||||||
|
other formats allowing raw_tex) will be passed through regardless of
|
||||||
|
whether latex_macros is enabled.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLiinnkkss
|
||||||
|
Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
AAuuttoommaattiicc lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
If you enclose a URL or email address in pointy brackets, it will
|
||||||
|
become a link:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<https://google.com>
|
||||||
|
<sam@green.eggs.ham>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInnlliinnee lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
An inline link consists of the link text in square brackets, followed
|
||||||
|
by the URL in parentheses. (Optionally, the URL can be followed by a
|
||||||
|
link title, in quotes.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is an [inline link](/url), and here's [one with
|
||||||
|
a title](https://fsf.org "click here for a good time!").
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
There can be no space between the bracketed part and the parenthesized
|
||||||
|
part. The link text can contain formatting (such as emphasis), but the
|
||||||
|
title cannot.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Email addresses in inline links are not autodetected, so they have to
|
||||||
|
be prefixed with mailto:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Write me!](mailto:sam@green.eggs.ham)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RReeffeerreennccee lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
An _e_x_p_l_i_c_i_t reference link has two parts, the link itself and the link
|
||||||
|
definition, which may occur elsewhere in the document (either before or
|
||||||
|
after the link).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The link consists of link text in square brackets, followed by a label
|
||||||
|
in square brackets. (There cannot be space between the two unless the
|
||||||
|
spaced_reference_links extension is enabled.) The link definition
|
||||||
|
consists of the bracketed label, followed by a colon and a space,
|
||||||
|
followed by the URL, and optionally (after a space) a link title either
|
||||||
|
in quotes or in parentheses. The label must not be parseable as a
|
||||||
|
citation (assuming the citations extension is enabled): citations take
|
||||||
|
precedence over link labels.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here are some examples:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[my label 1]: /foo/bar.html "My title, optional"
|
||||||
|
[my label 2]: /foo
|
||||||
|
[my label 3]: https://fsf.org (The free software foundation)
|
||||||
|
[my label 4]: /bar#special 'A title in single quotes'
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The URL may optionally be surrounded by angle brackets:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[my label 5]: <http://foo.bar.baz>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The title may go on the next line:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[my label 3]: https://fsf.org
|
||||||
|
"The free software foundation"
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that link labels are not case sensitive. So, this will work:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here is [my link][FOO]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Foo]: /bar/baz
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In an _i_m_p_l_i_c_i_t reference link, the second pair of brackets is empty:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See [my website][].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: In Markdown.pl and most other Markdown implementations, reference
|
||||||
|
link definitions cannot occur in nested constructions such as list
|
||||||
|
items or block quotes. Pandoc lifts this arbitrary seeming
|
||||||
|
restriction. So the following is fine in pandoc, though not in most
|
||||||
|
other implementations:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> My block [quote].
|
||||||
|
>
|
||||||
|
> [quote]: /foo
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: sshhoorrttccuutt__rreeffeerreennccee__lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
In a _s_h_o_r_t_c_u_t reference link, the second pair of brackets may be
|
||||||
|
omitted entirely:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See [my website].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInntteerrnnaall lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
To link to another section of the same document, use the automatically
|
||||||
|
generated identifier (see Heading identifiers). For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the [Introduction](#introduction).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
or
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the [Introduction].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Introduction]: #introduction
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including HTML
|
||||||
|
slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IImmaaggeess
|
||||||
|
A link immediately preceded by a ! will be treated as an image. The
|
||||||
|
link text will be used as the image’s alt text:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![la lune](lalune.jpg "Voyage to the moon")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![movie reel]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[movie reel]: movie.gif
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: iimmpplliicciitt__ffiigguurreess
|
||||||
|
An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a paragraph,
|
||||||
|
will be rendered as a figure with a caption. The image’s alt text will
|
||||||
|
be used as the caption.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![This is the caption](/url/of/image.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
How this is rendered depends on the output format. Some output formats
|
||||||
|
(e.g. RTF) do not yet support figures. In those formats, you’ll just
|
||||||
|
get an image in a paragraph by itself, with no caption.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you just want a regular inline image, just make sure it is not the
|
||||||
|
only thing in the paragraph. One way to do this is to insert a
|
||||||
|
nonbreaking space after the image:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![This image won't be a figure](/url/of/image.png)\
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph by itself
|
||||||
|
that has the stretch class will fill the screen, and the caption and
|
||||||
|
figure tags will be omitted.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: lliinnkk__aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
Attributes can be set on links and images:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
An inline ![image](foo.jpg){#id .class width=30 height=20px}
|
||||||
|
and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[ref]: foo.jpg "optional title" {#id .class key=val key2="val 2"}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
(This syntax is compatible with PHP Markdown Extra when only #id and
|
||||||
|
.class are used.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For HTML and EPUB, all known HTML5 attributes except width and height
|
||||||
|
(but including srcset and sizes) are passed through as is. Unknown
|
||||||
|
attributes are passed through as custom attributes, with data-
|
||||||
|
prepended. The other writers ignore attributes that are not
|
||||||
|
specifically supported by their output format.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The width and height attributes on images are treated specially. When
|
||||||
|
used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels. However, any of
|
||||||
|
the following unit identifiers can be used: px, cm, mm, in, inch and %.
|
||||||
|
There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit. For
|
||||||
|
example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![](file.jpg){ width=50% }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Dimensions may be converted to a form that is compatible with the
|
||||||
|
output format (for example, dimensions given in pixels will be
|
||||||
|
converted to inches when converting HTML to LaTeX). Conversion
|
||||||
|
between pixels and physical measurements is affected by the --dpi
|
||||||
|
option (by default, 96 dpi is assumed, unless the image itself
|
||||||
|
contains dpi information).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• The % unit is generally relative to some available space. For
|
||||||
|
example the above example will render to the following.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• HTML: <img href="file.jpg" style="width: 50%;" />
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• LaTeX:
|
||||||
|
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth,height=\textheight]{file.jpg}
|
||||||
|
(If you’re using a custom template, you need to configure graphicx
|
||||||
|
as in the default template.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• ConTeXt: \externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\textwidth]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Some output formats have a notion of a class (ConTeXt) or a unique
|
||||||
|
identifier (LaTeX \caption), or both (HTML).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• When no width or height attributes are specified, the fallback is to
|
||||||
|
look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata embedded in the
|
||||||
|
image file.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
DDiivvss aanndd SSppaannss
|
||||||
|
Using the native_divs and native_spans extensions (see above), HTML
|
||||||
|
syntax can be used as part of markdown to create native Div and Span
|
||||||
|
elements in the pandoc AST (as opposed to raw HTML). However, there is
|
||||||
|
also nicer syntax available:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ffeenncceedd__ddiivvss
|
||||||
|
Allow special fenced syntax for native Div blocks. A Div starts with a
|
||||||
|
fence containing at least three consecutive colons plus some
|
||||||
|
attributes. The attributes may optionally be followed by another
|
||||||
|
string of consecutive colons. The attribute syntax is exactly as in
|
||||||
|
fenced code blocks (see Extension: fenced_code_attributes). As with
|
||||||
|
fenced code blocks, one can use either attributes in curly braces or a
|
||||||
|
single unbraced word, which will be treated as a class name. The Div
|
||||||
|
ends with another line containing a string of at least three
|
||||||
|
consecutive colons. The fenced Div should be separated by blank lines
|
||||||
|
from preceding and following blocks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::::: {#special .sidebar}
|
||||||
|
Here is a paragraph.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
And another.
|
||||||
|
:::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Fenced divs can be nested. Opening fences are distinguished because
|
||||||
|
they _m_u_s_t have attributes:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: Warning ::::::
|
||||||
|
This is a warning.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: Danger
|
||||||
|
This is a warning within a warning.
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::::::::::::::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Fences without attributes are always closing fences. Unlike with
|
||||||
|
fenced code blocks, the number of colons in the closing fence need not
|
||||||
|
match the number in the opening fence. However, it can be helpful for
|
||||||
|
visual clarity to use fences of different lengths to distinguish nested
|
||||||
|
divs from their parents.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: bbrraacckkeetteedd__ssppaannss
|
||||||
|
A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin a link, will
|
||||||
|
be treated as a Span with attributes if it is followed immediately by
|
||||||
|
attributes:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[This is *some text*]{.class key="val"}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FFoooottnnootteess
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ffoooottnnootteess
|
||||||
|
Pandoc’s Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here is a footnote reference,[^1] and another.[^longnote]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^1]: Here is the footnote.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
|
||||||
|
belong to the previous footnote.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{ some.code }
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
|
||||||
|
line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
|
||||||
|
multi-paragraph list items.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This paragraph won't be part of the note, because it
|
||||||
|
isn't indented.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The identifiers in footnote references may not contain spaces, tabs, or
|
||||||
|
newlines. These identifiers are used only to correlate the footnote
|
||||||
|
reference with the note itself; in the output, footnotes will be
|
||||||
|
numbered sequentially.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The footnotes themselves need not be placed at the end of the document.
|
||||||
|
They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements (lists,
|
||||||
|
block quotes, tables, etc.). Each footnote should be separated from
|
||||||
|
surrounding content (including other footnotes) by blank lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: iinnlliinnee__nnootteess
|
||||||
|
Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes, they
|
||||||
|
cannot contain multiple paragraphs). The syntax is as follows:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here is an inline note.^[Inlines notes are easier to write, since
|
||||||
|
you don't have to pick an identifier and move down to type the
|
||||||
|
note.]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCiittaattiioonn ssyynnttaaxx
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: cciittaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
To cite a bibliographic item with an identifier foo, use the syntax
|
||||||
|
@foo. Normal citations should be included in square brackets, with
|
||||||
|
semicolons separating distinct items:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Blah blah [@doe99; @smith2000; @smith2004].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
How this is rendered depends on the citation style. In an author-date
|
||||||
|
style, it might render as
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Blah blah (Doe 1999, Smith 2000, 2004).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In a footnote style, it might render as
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Blah blah.[^1]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^1]: John Doe, "Frogs," *Journal of Amphibians* 44 (1999);
|
||||||
|
Susan Smith, "Flies," *Journal of Insects* (2000);
|
||||||
|
Susan Smith, "Bees," *Journal of Insects* (2004).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the CSL user documentation for more information about CSL styles
|
||||||
|
and how they affect rendering.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Unless a citation key start with a letter, digit, or _, and contains
|
||||||
|
only alphanumerics and internal punctuation characters (:.#$%&-+?<>~/),
|
||||||
|
it must be surrounded by curly braces, which are not considered part of
|
||||||
|
the key. In @Foo_bar.baz., the key is Foo_bar.baz. The final period
|
||||||
|
is not _i_n_t_e_r_n_a_l punctuation, so it is not included in the key. In
|
||||||
|
@{Foo_bar.baz.}, the key is Foo_bar.baz., including the final period.
|
||||||
|
The curly braces are recommended if you use URLs as keys:
|
||||||
|
[@{https://example.com/bib?name=foobar&date=2000}, p. 33].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Citation items may optionally include a prefix, a locator, and a
|
||||||
|
suffix. In
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Blah blah [see @doe99, pp. 33-35 and *passim*; @smith04, chap. 1].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The first item (doe99) has prefix see, locator pp. 33-35, and suffix
|
||||||
|
and *passim*. The second item (smith04) has locator chap. 1 and no
|
||||||
|
prefix or suffix.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc uses some heuristics to separate the locator from the rest of
|
||||||
|
the subject. It is sensitive to the locator terms defined in the CSL
|
||||||
|
locale files. Either abbreviated or unabbreviated forms are accepted.
|
||||||
|
In the en-US locale, locator terms can be written in either singular or
|
||||||
|
plural forms, as book, bk./bks.; chapter, chap./chaps.; column,
|
||||||
|
col./cols.; figure, fig./figs.; folio, fol./fols.; number, no./nos.;
|
||||||
|
line, l./ll.; note, n./nn.; opus, op./opp.; page, p./pp.; paragraph,
|
||||||
|
para./paras.; part, pt./pts.; section, sec./secs.; sub verbo,
|
||||||
|
s.v./s.vv.; verse, v./vv.; volume, vol./vols.; ¶/¶¶; §/§§. If no
|
||||||
|
locator term is used, “page” is assumed.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In complex cases, you can force something to be treated as a locator by
|
||||||
|
enclosing it in curly braces or prevent parsing the suffix as locator
|
||||||
|
by prepending curly braces:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[@smith{ii, A, D-Z}, with a suffix]
|
||||||
|
[@smith, {pp. iv, vi-xi, (xv)-(xvii)} with suffix here]
|
||||||
|
[@smith{}, 99 years later]
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A minus sign (-) before the @ will suppress mention of the author in
|
||||||
|
the citation. This can be useful when the author is already mentioned
|
||||||
|
in the text:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Smith says blah [-@smith04].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
You can also write an author-in-text citation, by omitting the square
|
||||||
|
brackets:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@smith04 says blah.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@smith04 [p. 33] says blah.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This will cause the author’s name to be rendered, followed by the
|
||||||
|
bibliographical details. Use this form when you want to make the
|
||||||
|
citation the subject of a sentence.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
When you are using a note style, it is usually better to let citeproc
|
||||||
|
create the footnotes from citations rather than writing an explicit
|
||||||
|
note. If you do write an explicit note that contains a citation, note
|
||||||
|
that normal citations will be put in parentheses, while author-in-text
|
||||||
|
citations will not. For this reason, it is sometimes preferable to use
|
||||||
|
the author-in-text style inside notes when using a note style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
NNoonn--ddeeffaauulltt eexxtteennssiioonnss
|
||||||
|
The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default in
|
||||||
|
pandoc, but may be enabled by adding +EXTENSION to the format name,
|
||||||
|
where EXTENSION is the name of the extension. Thus, for example,
|
||||||
|
markdown+hard_line_breaks is Markdown with hard line breaks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: rreebbaassee__rreellaattiivvee__ppaatthhss
|
||||||
|
Rewrite relative paths for Markdown links and images, depending on the
|
||||||
|
path of the file containing the link or image link. For each link or
|
||||||
|
image, pandoc will compute the directory of the containing file,
|
||||||
|
relative to the working directory, and prepend the resulting path to
|
||||||
|
the link or image path.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The use of this extension is best understood by example. Suppose you
|
||||||
|
have a a subdirectory for each chapter of a book, chap1, chap2, chap3.
|
||||||
|
Each contains a file text.md and a number of images used in the
|
||||||
|
chapter. You would like to have ![image](spider.jpg) in chap1/text.md
|
||||||
|
refer to chap1/spider.jpg and ![image](spider.jpg) in chap2/text.md
|
||||||
|
refer to chap2/spider.jpg. To do this, use
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc chap*/*.md -f markdown+rebase_relative_paths
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Without this extension, you would have to use
|
||||||
|
![image](chap1/spider.jpg) in chap1/text.md and
|
||||||
|
![image](chap2/spider.jpg) in chap2/text.md. Links with relative paths
|
||||||
|
will be rewritten in the same way as images.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Absolute paths and URLs are not changed. Neither are empty paths or
|
||||||
|
paths consisting entirely of a fragment, e.g., #foo.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that relative paths in reference links and images will be
|
||||||
|
rewritten relative to the file containing the link reference
|
||||||
|
definition, not the file containing the reference link or image itself,
|
||||||
|
if these differ.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
Allows attributes to be attached to any inline or block-level element.
|
||||||
|
The syntax for the attributes is the same as that used in
|
||||||
|
header_attributes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Attributes that occur immediately after an inline element affect that
|
||||||
|
element. If they follow a space, then they belong to the space.
|
||||||
|
(Hence, this option subsumes inline_code_attributes and
|
||||||
|
link_attributes.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Attributes that occur immediately before a block element, on a line
|
||||||
|
by themselves, affect that element.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Consecutive attribute specifiers may be used, either for blocks or
|
||||||
|
for inlines. Their attributes will be combined.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Attributes that occur at the end of the text of a Setext or ATX
|
||||||
|
heading (separated by whitespace from the text) affect the heading
|
||||||
|
element. (Hence, this option subsumes header_attributes.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Attributes that occur after the opening fence in a fenced code block
|
||||||
|
affect the code block element. (Hence, this option subsumes
|
||||||
|
fenced_code_attributes.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Attributes that occur at the end of a reference link definition
|
||||||
|
affect links that refer to that definition.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that pandoc’s AST does not currently allow attributes to be
|
||||||
|
attached to arbitrary elements. Hence a Span or Div container will be
|
||||||
|
added if needed.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: oolldd__ddaasshheess
|
||||||
|
Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes: -
|
||||||
|
before a numeral is an en-dash, and -- is an em-dash. This option only
|
||||||
|
has an effect if smart is enabled. It is selected automatically for
|
||||||
|
textile input.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aannggllee__bbrraacckkeettss__eessccaappaabbllee
|
||||||
|
Allow < and > to be backslash-escaped, as they can be in GitHub
|
||||||
|
flavored Markdown but not original Markdown. This is implied by
|
||||||
|
pandoc’s default all_symbols_escapable.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: lliissttss__wwiitthhoouutt__pprreecceeddiinngg__bbllaannkklliinnee
|
||||||
|
Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening
|
||||||
|
blank space.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ffoouurr__ssppaaccee__rruullee
|
||||||
|
Selects the pandoc <= 2.0 behavior for parsing lists, so that four
|
||||||
|
spaces indent are needed for list item continuation paragraphs.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssppaacceedd__rreeffeerreennccee__lliinnkkss
|
||||||
|
Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link, for
|
||||||
|
example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[foo] [bar].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: hhaarrdd__lliinnee__bbrreeaakkss
|
||||||
|
Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
|
||||||
|
breaks instead of spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: iiggnnoorree__lliinnee__bbrreeaakkss
|
||||||
|
Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
|
||||||
|
treated as spaces or as hard line breaks. This option is intended for
|
||||||
|
use with East Asian languages where spaces are not used between words,
|
||||||
|
but text is divided into lines for readability.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: eeaasstt__aassiiaann__lliinnee__bbrreeaakkss
|
||||||
|
Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
|
||||||
|
treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur between two
|
||||||
|
East Asian wide characters. This is a better choice than
|
||||||
|
ignore_line_breaks for texts that include a mix of East Asian wide
|
||||||
|
characters and other characters.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: eemmoojjii
|
||||||
|
Parses textual emojis like :smile: as Unicode emoticons.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: tteexx__mmaatthh__ssiinnggllee__bbaacckkssllaasshh
|
||||||
|
Causes anything between \( and \) to be interpreted as inline TeX math,
|
||||||
|
and anything between \[ and \] to be interpreted as display TeX math.
|
||||||
|
Note: a drawback of this extension is that it precludes escaping ( and
|
||||||
|
[.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: tteexx__mmaatthh__ddoouubbllee__bbaacckkssllaasshh
|
||||||
|
Causes anything between \\( and \\) to be interpreted as inline TeX
|
||||||
|
math, and anything between \\[ and \\] to be interpreted as display TeX
|
||||||
|
math.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: mmaarrkkddoowwnn__aattttrriibbuuttee
|
||||||
|
By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as
|
||||||
|
Markdown. This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only
|
||||||
|
parsed inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute
|
||||||
|
markdown=1.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: mmmmdd__ttiittllee__bblloocckk
|
||||||
|
Enables a MultiMarkdown style title block at the top of the document,
|
||||||
|
for example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Title: My title
|
||||||
|
Author: John Doe
|
||||||
|
Date: September 1, 2008
|
||||||
|
Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
|
||||||
|
a field spanning multiple lines.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details. If pandoc_title_block
|
||||||
|
or yaml_metadata_block is enabled, it will take precedence over
|
||||||
|
mmd_title_block.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aabbbbrreevviiaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*[HTML]: Hypertext Markup Language
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that the pandoc document model does not support abbreviations, so
|
||||||
|
if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are simply skipped (as
|
||||||
|
opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: aauuttoolliinnkk__bbaarree__uurriiss
|
||||||
|
Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by pointy
|
||||||
|
braces <...>.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: mmmmdd__lliinnkk__aattttrriibbuutteess
|
||||||
|
Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link and image
|
||||||
|
references. This extension should not be confused with the
|
||||||
|
link_attributes extension.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[ref]: https://path.to/image "Image title" width=20px height=30px
|
||||||
|
id=myId class="myClass1 myClass2"
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: mmmmdd__hheeaaddeerr__iiddeennttiiffiieerrss
|
||||||
|
Parses multimarkdown style heading identifiers (in square brackets,
|
||||||
|
after the heading but before any trailing #s in an ATX heading).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ccoommppaacctt__ddeeffiinniittiioonn__lliissttss
|
||||||
|
Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
|
||||||
|
This syntax differs from the one described above under Definition lists
|
||||||
|
in several respects:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• No blank line is required between consecutive items of the definition
|
||||||
|
list.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• To get a “tight” or “compact” list, omit space between consecutive
|
||||||
|
items; the space between a term and its definition does not affect
|
||||||
|
anything.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition
|
||||||
|
must be indented four spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: gguutteennbbeerrgg
|
||||||
|
Use Project Gutenberg conventions for plain output: all-caps for strong
|
||||||
|
emphasis, surround by underscores for regular emphasis, add extra blank
|
||||||
|
space around headings.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EExxtteennssiioonn:: ssoouurrcceeppooss
|
||||||
|
Include source position attributes when parsing commonmark. For
|
||||||
|
elements that accept attributes, a data-pos attribute is added; other
|
||||||
|
elements are placed in a surrounding Div or Span elemnet with a
|
||||||
|
data-pos attribute.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
MMaarrkkddoowwnn vvaarriiaannttss
|
||||||
|
In addition to pandoc’s extended Markdown, the following Markdown
|
||||||
|
variants are supported:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_phpextra (PHP Markdown Extra)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_github (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_mmd (MultiMarkdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• markdown_strict (Markdown.pl)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• commonmark (CommonMark)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• gfm (Github-Flavored Markdown)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• commonmark_x (CommonMark with many pandoc extensions)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To see which extensions are supported for a given format, and which are
|
||||||
|
enabled by default, you can use the command
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --list-extensions=FORMAT
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
where FORMAT is replaced with the name of the format.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that the list of extensions for commonmark, gfm, and commonmark_x
|
||||||
|
are defined relative to default commonmark. So, for example,
|
||||||
|
backtick_code_blocks does not appear as an extension, since it is
|
||||||
|
enabled by default and cannot be disabled.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCIITTAATTIIOONNSS
|
||||||
|
When the --citeproc option is used, pandoc can automatically generate
|
||||||
|
citations and a bibliography in a number of styles. Basic usage is
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --citeproc myinput.txt
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To use this feature, you will need to have
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• a document containing citations (see Extension: citations);
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• a source of bibliographic data: either an external bibliography file
|
||||||
|
or a list of references in the document’s YAML metadata
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• optionally, a CSL citation style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSppeecciiffyyiinngg bbiibblliiooggrraapphhiicc ddaattaa
|
||||||
|
You can specify an external bibliography using the bibliography
|
||||||
|
metadata field in a YAML metadata section or the --bibliography command
|
||||||
|
line argument. If you want to use multiple bibliography files, you can
|
||||||
|
supply multiple --bibliography arguments or set bibliography metadata
|
||||||
|
field to YAML array. A bibliography may have any of these formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Format File extension
|
||||||
|
──────────────────────────
|
||||||
|
BibLaTeX .bib
|
||||||
|
BibTeX .bibtex
|
||||||
|
CSL JSON .json
|
||||||
|
CSL YAML .yaml
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that .bib can be used with both BibTeX and BibLaTeX files; use the
|
||||||
|
extension .bibtex to force interpretation as BibTeX.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc parses LaTeX markup inside
|
||||||
|
fields such as title; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown; and in
|
||||||
|
CSL JSON databases, an HTML-like markup:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<<ii>>......<<//ii>>
|
||||||
|
italics
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<<bb>>......<<//bb>>
|
||||||
|
bold
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<<ssppaann ssttyyllee==""ffoonntt--vvaarriiaanntt::ssmmaallll--ccaappss;;"">>......<<//ssppaann>> or <<sscc>>......<<//sscc>>
|
||||||
|
small capitals
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<<ssuubb>>......<<//ssuubb>>
|
||||||
|
subscript
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<<ssuupp>>......<<//ssuupp>>
|
||||||
|
superscript
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<<ssppaann ccllaassss==""nnooccaassee"">>......<<//ssppaann>>
|
||||||
|
prevent a phrase from being capitalized as title case
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using
|
||||||
|
--bibliography or the YAML metadata field bibliography, you can include
|
||||||
|
the citation data directly in the references field of the document’s
|
||||||
|
YAML metadata. The field should contain an array of YAML-encoded
|
||||||
|
references, for example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
references:
|
||||||
|
- type: article-journal
|
||||||
|
id: WatsonCrick1953
|
||||||
|
author:
|
||||||
|
- family: Watson
|
||||||
|
given: J. D.
|
||||||
|
- family: Crick
|
||||||
|
given: F. H. C.
|
||||||
|
issued:
|
||||||
|
date-parts:
|
||||||
|
- - 1953
|
||||||
|
- 4
|
||||||
|
- 25
|
||||||
|
title: 'Molecular structure of nucleic acids: a structure for
|
||||||
|
deoxyribose nucleic acid'
|
||||||
|
title-short: Molecular structure of nucleic acids
|
||||||
|
container-title: Nature
|
||||||
|
volume: 171
|
||||||
|
issue: 4356
|
||||||
|
page: 737-738
|
||||||
|
DOI: 10.1038/171737a0
|
||||||
|
URL: https://www.nature.com/articles/171737a0
|
||||||
|
language: en-GB
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If both an external bibliography and inline (YAML metadata) references
|
||||||
|
are provided, both will be used. In case of conflicting ids, the
|
||||||
|
inline references will take precedence.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that pandoc can be used to produce such a YAML metadata section
|
||||||
|
from a BibTeX, BibLaTeX, or CSL JSON bibliography:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t markdown
|
||||||
|
pandoc chem.json -s -f csljson -t markdown
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Indeed, pandoc can convert between any of these citation formats:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t csljson
|
||||||
|
pandoc chem.yaml -s -f markdown -t biblatex
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Running pandoc on a bibliography file with the --citeproc option will
|
||||||
|
create a formatted bibliography in the format of your choice:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.html
|
||||||
|
pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.pdf
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCaappiittaalliizzaattiioonn iinn ttiittlleess
|
||||||
|
If you are using a bibtex or biblatex bibliography, then observe the
|
||||||
|
following rules:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• English titles should be in title case. Non-English titles should be
|
||||||
|
in sentence case, and the langid field in biblatex should be set to
|
||||||
|
the relevant language. (The following values are treated as English:
|
||||||
|
american, british, canadian, english, australian, newzealand,
|
||||||
|
USenglish, or UKenglish.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• As is standard with bibtex/biblatex, proper names should be protected
|
||||||
|
with curly braces so that they won’t be lowercased in styles that
|
||||||
|
call for sentence case. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
title = {My Dinner with {Andre}}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• In addition, words that should remain lowercase (or camelCase) should
|
||||||
|
be protected:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
title = {Spin Wave Dispersion on the {nm} Scale}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Though this is not necessary in bibtex/biblatex, it is necessary with
|
||||||
|
citeproc, which stores titles internally in sentence case, and
|
||||||
|
converts to title case in styles that require it. Here we protect
|
||||||
|
“nm” so that it doesn’t get converted to “Nm” at this stage.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you are using a CSL bibliography (either JSON or YAML), then observe
|
||||||
|
the following rules:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• All titles should be in sentence case.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Use the language field for non-English titles to prevent their
|
||||||
|
conversion to title case in styles that call for this. (Conversion
|
||||||
|
happens only if language begins with en or is left empty.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Protect words that should not be converted to title case using this
|
||||||
|
syntax:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Spin wave dispersion on the <span class="nocase">nm</span> scale
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCoonnffeerreennccee PPaappeerrss,, PPuubblliisshheedd vvss.. UUnnppuubblliisshheedd
|
||||||
|
For a formally published conference paper, use the biblatex entry type
|
||||||
|
inproceedings (which will be mapped to CSL paper-conference).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For an unpublished manuscript, use the biblatex entry type unpublished
|
||||||
|
without an eventtitle field (this entry type will be mapped to CSL
|
||||||
|
manuscript).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For a talk, an unpublished conference paper, or a poster presentation,
|
||||||
|
use the biblatex entry type unpublished with an eventtitle field (this
|
||||||
|
entry type will be mapped to CSL speech). Use the biblatex type field
|
||||||
|
to indicate the type, e.g. “Paper”, or “Poster”. venue and eventdate
|
||||||
|
may be useful too, though eventdate will not be rendered by most CSL
|
||||||
|
styles. Note that venue is for the event’s venue, unlike location
|
||||||
|
which describes the publisher’s location; do not use the latter for an
|
||||||
|
unpublished conference paper.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSppeecciiffyyiinngg aa cciittaattiioonn ssttyyllee
|
||||||
|
Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by
|
||||||
|
the Citation Style Language, listed in the Zotero Style Repository.
|
||||||
|
These files are specified using the --csl option or the csl (or
|
||||||
|
citation-style) metadata field. By default, pandoc will use the
|
||||||
|
Chicago Manual of Style author-date format. (You can override this
|
||||||
|
default by copying a CSL style of your choice to default.csl in your
|
||||||
|
user data directory.) The CSL project provides further information on
|
||||||
|
finding and editing styles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The --citation-abbreviations option (or the citation-abbreviations
|
||||||
|
metadata field) may be used to specify a JSON file containing
|
||||||
|
abbreviations of journals that should be used in formatted
|
||||||
|
bibliographies when form="short" is specified. The format of the file
|
||||||
|
can be illustrated with an example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{ "default": {
|
||||||
|
"container-title": {
|
||||||
|
"Lloyd's Law Reports": "Lloyd's Rep",
|
||||||
|
"Estates Gazette": "EG",
|
||||||
|
"Scots Law Times": "SLT"
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCiittaattiioonnss iinn nnoottee ssttyylleess
|
||||||
|
Pandoc’s citation processing is designed to allow you to move between
|
||||||
|
author-date, numerical, and note styles without modifying the markdown
|
||||||
|
source. When you’re using a note style, avoid inserting footnotes
|
||||||
|
manually. Instead, insert citations just as you would in an author-
|
||||||
|
date style—for example,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Blah blah [@foo, p. 33].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The footnote will be created automatically. Pandoc will take care of
|
||||||
|
removing the space and moving the note before or after the period,
|
||||||
|
depending on the setting of notes-after-punctuation, as described below
|
||||||
|
in Other relevant metadata fields.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In some cases you may need to put a citation inside a regular footnote.
|
||||||
|
Normal citations in footnotes (such as [@foo, p. 33]) will be rendered
|
||||||
|
in parentheses. In-text citations (such as @foo [p. 33]) will be
|
||||||
|
rendered without parentheses. (A comma will be added if appropriate.)
|
||||||
|
Thus:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^1]: Some studies [@foo; @bar, p. 33] show that
|
||||||
|
frubulicious zoosnaps are quantical. For a survey
|
||||||
|
of the literature, see @baz [chap. 1].
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RRaaww ccoonntteenntt iinn aa ssttyyllee
|
||||||
|
To include raw content in a prefix, suffix, delimiter, or term,
|
||||||
|
surround it with these tags indicating the format:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
{{jats}}<ref>{{/jats}}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Without the tags, the string will be interpreted as a string and
|
||||||
|
escaped in the output, rather than being passed through raw.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This feature allows stylesheets to be customized to give different
|
||||||
|
output for different output formats. However, stylesheets customized
|
||||||
|
in this way will not be usable by other CSL implementations.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
PPllaacceemmeenntt ooff tthhee bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy
|
||||||
|
If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed in a
|
||||||
|
div with id refs, if one exists:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {#refs}
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Otherwise, it will be placed at the end of the document. Generation of
|
||||||
|
the bibliography can be suppressed by setting suppress-bibliography:
|
||||||
|
true in the YAML metadata.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you wish the bibliography to have a section heading, you can set
|
||||||
|
reference-section-title in the metadata, or put the heading at the
|
||||||
|
beginning of the div with id refs (if you are using it) or at the end
|
||||||
|
of your document:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
last paragraph...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# References
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The bibliography will be inserted after this heading. Note that the
|
||||||
|
unnumbered class will be added to this heading, so that the section
|
||||||
|
will not be numbered.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInncclluuddiinngg uunncciitteedd iitteemmss iinn tthhee bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy
|
||||||
|
If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually
|
||||||
|
citing them in the body text, you can define a dummy nocite metadata
|
||||||
|
field and put the citations there:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
nocite: |
|
||||||
|
@item1, @item2
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@item3
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In this example, the document will contain a citation for item3 only,
|
||||||
|
but the bibliography will contain entries for item1, item2, and item3.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations, whether
|
||||||
|
or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
nocite: |
|
||||||
|
@*
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For LaTeX output, you can also use natbib or biblatex to render the
|
||||||
|
bibliography. In order to do so, specify bibliography files as
|
||||||
|
outlined above, and add --natbib or --biblatex argument to pandoc
|
||||||
|
invocation. Bear in mind that bibliography files have to be in either
|
||||||
|
BibTeX (for --natbib) or BibLaTeX (for --biblatex) format.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOtthheerr rreelleevvaanntt mmeettaaddaattaa ffiieellddss
|
||||||
|
A few other metadata fields affect bibliography formatting:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
lliinnkk--cciittaattiioonnss
|
||||||
|
If true, citations will be hyperlinked to the corresponding
|
||||||
|
bibliography entries (for author-date and numerical styles
|
||||||
|
only).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
llaanngg The lang field will affect how the style is localized, for
|
||||||
|
example in the translation of labels, the use of quotation
|
||||||
|
marks, and the way items are sorted. (For backwards
|
||||||
|
compatibility, locale may be used instead of lang, but this use
|
||||||
|
is deprecated.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
A BCP 47 language tag is expected: for example, en, de, en-US,
|
||||||
|
fr-CA, ug-Cyrl. The unicode extension syntax (after -u-) may be
|
||||||
|
used to specify options for collation (sorting) more precisely.
|
||||||
|
Here are some examples:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• zh-u-co-pinyin – Chinese with the Pinyin collation.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• es-u-co-trad – Spanish with the traditional collation (with Ch
|
||||||
|
sorting after C).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• fr-u-kb – French with “backwards” accent sorting (with coté
|
||||||
|
sorting after côte).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• en-US-u-kf-upper – English with uppercase letters sorting
|
||||||
|
before lower (default is lower before upper).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
nnootteess--aafftteerr--ppuunnccttuuaattiioonn
|
||||||
|
If true (the default), pandoc will put footnote citations after
|
||||||
|
following punctuation. For example, if the source contains blah
|
||||||
|
blah [@jones99]., the result will look like blah blah.[^1], with
|
||||||
|
the note moved after the period and the space collapsed. If
|
||||||
|
false, the space will still be collapsed, but the footnote will
|
||||||
|
not be moved after the punctuation.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSLLIIDDEE SSHHOOWWSS
|
||||||
|
You can use pandoc to produce an HTML + JavaScript slide presentation
|
||||||
|
that can be viewed via a web browser. There are five ways to do this,
|
||||||
|
using S5, DZSlides, Slidy, Slideous, or reveal.js. You can also
|
||||||
|
produce a PDF slide show using LaTeX beamer, or slides shows in
|
||||||
|
Microsoft PowerPoint format.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Here’s the Markdown source for a simple slide show, habits.txt:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
% Habits
|
||||||
|
% John Doe
|
||||||
|
% March 22, 2005
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# In the morning
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Getting up
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- Turn off alarm
|
||||||
|
- Get out of bed
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Breakfast
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- Eat eggs
|
||||||
|
- Drink coffee
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# In the evening
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Dinner
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- Eat spaghetti
|
||||||
|
- Drink wine
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
------------------
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![picture of spaghetti](images/spaghetti.jpg)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Going to sleep
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- Get in bed
|
||||||
|
- Count sheep
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To produce an HTML/JavaScript slide show, simply type
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -t FORMAT -s habits.txt -o habits.html
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
where FORMAT is either s5, slidy, slideous, dzslides, or revealjs.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by pandoc
|
||||||
|
with the -s/--standalone option embeds a link to JavaScript and CSS
|
||||||
|
files, which are assumed to be available at the relative path
|
||||||
|
s5/default (for S5), slideous (for Slideous), reveal.js (for
|
||||||
|
reveal.js), or at the Slidy website at w3.org (for Slidy). (These
|
||||||
|
paths can be changed by setting the slidy-url, slideous-url,
|
||||||
|
revealjs-url, or s5-url variables; see Variables for HTML slides,
|
||||||
|
above.) For DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are
|
||||||
|
included in the file by default.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
With all HTML slide formats, the --self-contained option can be used to
|
||||||
|
produce a single file that contains all of the data necessary to
|
||||||
|
display the slide show, including linked scripts, stylesheets, images,
|
||||||
|
and videos.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To produce a PDF slide show using beamer, type
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -o habits.pdf
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that a reveal.js slide show can also be converted to a PDF by
|
||||||
|
printing it to a file from the browser.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To produce a Powerpoint slide show, type
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc habits.txt -o habits.pptx
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSttrruuccttuurriinngg tthhee sslliiddee sshhooww
|
||||||
|
By default, the _s_l_i_d_e _l_e_v_e_l is the highest heading level in the
|
||||||
|
hierarchy that is followed immediately by content, and not another
|
||||||
|
heading, somewhere in the document. In the example above, level-1
|
||||||
|
headings are always followed by level-2 headings, which are followed by
|
||||||
|
content, so the slide level is 2. This default can be overridden using
|
||||||
|
the --slide-level option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The document is carved up into slides according to the following rules:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• A horizontal rule always starts a new slide.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• A heading at the slide level always starts a new slide.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Headings _b_e_l_o_w the slide level in the hierarchy create headings
|
||||||
|
_w_i_t_h_i_n a slide. (In beamer, a “block” will be created. If the
|
||||||
|
heading has the class example, an exampleblock environment will be
|
||||||
|
used; if it has the class alert, an alertblock will be used;
|
||||||
|
otherwise a regular block will be used.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• Headings _a_b_o_v_e the slide level in the hierarchy create “title
|
||||||
|
slides,” which just contain the section title and help to break the
|
||||||
|
slide show into sections. Non-slide content under these headings
|
||||||
|
will be included on the title slide (for HTML slide shows) or in a
|
||||||
|
subsequent slide with the same title (for beamer).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• A title page is constructed automatically from the document’s title
|
||||||
|
block, if present. (In the case of beamer, this can be disabled by
|
||||||
|
commenting out some lines in the default template.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
These rules are designed to support many different styles of slide
|
||||||
|
show. If you don’t care about structuring your slides into sections
|
||||||
|
and subsections, you can just use level-1 headings for all each slide.
|
||||||
|
(In that case, level-1 will be the slide level.) But you can also
|
||||||
|
structure the slide show into sections, as in the example above.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: in reveal.js slide shows, if slide level is 2, a two-dimensional
|
||||||
|
layout will be produced, with level-1 headings building horizontally
|
||||||
|
and level-2 headings building vertically. It is not recommended that
|
||||||
|
you use deeper nesting of section levels with reveal.js.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInnccrreemmeennttaall lliissttss
|
||||||
|
By default, these writers produce lists that display “all at once.” If
|
||||||
|
you want your lists to display incrementally (one item at a time), use
|
||||||
|
the -i option. If you want a particular list to depart from the
|
||||||
|
default, put it in a div block with class incremental or
|
||||||
|
nonincremental. So, for example, using the fenced div syntax, the
|
||||||
|
following would be incremental regardless of the document default:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: incremental
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- Eat spaghetti
|
||||||
|
- Drink wine
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
or
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: nonincremental
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- Eat spaghetti
|
||||||
|
- Drink wine
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
While using incremental and nonincremental divs are the recommended
|
||||||
|
method of setting incremental lists on a per-case basis, an older
|
||||||
|
method is also supported: putting lists inside a blockquote will depart
|
||||||
|
from the document default (that is, it will display incrementally
|
||||||
|
without the -i option and all at once with the -i option):
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> - Eat spaghetti
|
||||||
|
> - Drink wine
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Both methods allow incremental and nonincremental lists to be mixed in
|
||||||
|
a single document.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: Neither the -i/--incremental option nor any of the methods
|
||||||
|
described here currently works for PowerPoint output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInnsseerrttiinngg ppaauusseess
|
||||||
|
You can add “pauses” within a slide by including a paragraph containing
|
||||||
|
three dots, separated by spaces:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Slide with a pause
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
content before the pause
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
. . .
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
content after the pause
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note: this feature is not yet implemented for PowerPoint output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSttyylliinngg tthhee sslliiddeess
|
||||||
|
You can change the style of HTML slides by putting customized CSS files
|
||||||
|
in $DATADIR/s5/default (for S5), $DATADIR/slidy (for Slidy), or
|
||||||
|
$DATADIR/slideous (for Slideous), where $DATADIR is the user data
|
||||||
|
directory (see --data-dir, above). The originals may be found in
|
||||||
|
pandoc’s system data directory (generally
|
||||||
|
$CABALDIR/pandoc-VERSION/s5/default). Pandoc will look there for any
|
||||||
|
files it does not find in the user data directory.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For dzslides, the CSS is included in the HTML file itself, and may be
|
||||||
|
modified there.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
All reveal.js configuration options can be set through variables. For
|
||||||
|
example, themes can be used by setting the theme variable:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
-V theme=moon
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Or you can specify a custom stylesheet using the --css option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To style beamer slides, you can specify a theme, colortheme, fonttheme,
|
||||||
|
innertheme, and outertheme, using the -V option:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -V theme:Warsaw -o habits.pdf
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that heading attributes will turn into slide attributes (on a
|
||||||
|
<div> or <section>) in HTML slide formats, allowing you to style
|
||||||
|
individual slides. In beamer, the only heading attribute that affects
|
||||||
|
slides is the allowframebreaks class, which sets the allowframebreaks
|
||||||
|
option, causing multiple slides to be created if the content overfills
|
||||||
|
the frame. This is recommended especially for bibliographies:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# References {.allowframebreaks}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSppeeaakkeerr nnootteess
|
||||||
|
Speaker notes are supported in reveal.js and PowerPoint (pptx) output.
|
||||||
|
You can add notes to your Markdown document thus:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: notes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is my note.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- It can contain Markdown
|
||||||
|
- like this list
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To show the notes window in reveal.js, press s while viewing the
|
||||||
|
presentation. Speaker notes in PowerPoint will be available, as usual,
|
||||||
|
in handouts and presenter view.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Notes are not yet supported for other slide formats, but the notes will
|
||||||
|
not appear on the slides themselves.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCoolluummnnss
|
||||||
|
To put material in side by side columns, you can use a native div
|
||||||
|
container with class columns, containing two or more div containers
|
||||||
|
with class column and a width attribute:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::::::::::::: {.columns}
|
||||||
|
::: {.column width="40%"}
|
||||||
|
contents...
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::: {.column width="60%"}
|
||||||
|
contents...
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::::::::::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
AAddddiittiioonnaall ccoolluummnnss aattttrriibbuutteess iinn bbeeaammeerr
|
||||||
|
The div containers with classes columns and column can optionally have
|
||||||
|
an align attribute. The class columns can optionally have a totalwidth
|
||||||
|
attribute or an onlytextwidth class.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::::::::::::: {.columns align=center totalwidth=8em}
|
||||||
|
::: {.column width="40%"}
|
||||||
|
contents...
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::: {.column width="60%" align=bottom}
|
||||||
|
contents...
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::::::::::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The align attributes on columns and column can be used with the values
|
||||||
|
top, top-baseline, center and bottom to vertically align the columns.
|
||||||
|
It defaults to top in columns.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The totalwidth attribute limits the width of the columns to the given
|
||||||
|
value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::::::::::::: {.columns align=top .onlytextwidth}
|
||||||
|
::: {.column width="40%" align=center}
|
||||||
|
contents...
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::: {.column width="60%"}
|
||||||
|
contents...
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::::::::::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The class onlytextwidth sets the totalwidth to \textwidth.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See Section 12.7 of the Beamer User’s Guide for more details.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
FFrraammee aattttrriibbuutteess iinn bbeeaammeerr
|
||||||
|
Sometimes it is necessary to add the LaTeX [fragile] option to a frame
|
||||||
|
in beamer (for example, when using the minted environment). This can
|
||||||
|
be forced by adding the fragile class to the heading introducing the
|
||||||
|
slide:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Fragile slide {.fragile}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
All of the other frame attributes described in Section 8.1 of the
|
||||||
|
Beamer User’s Guide may also be used: allowdisplaybreaks,
|
||||||
|
allowframebreaks, b, c, t, environment, label, plain, shrink, standout,
|
||||||
|
noframenumbering.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
BBaacckkggrroouunndd iinn rreevveeaall..jjss aanndd bbeeaammeerr
|
||||||
|
Background images can be added to self-contained reveal.js slideshows
|
||||||
|
and to beamer slideshows.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For the same image on every slide, use the configuration option
|
||||||
|
background-image either in the YAML metadata block or as a command-line
|
||||||
|
variable. (There are no other options in beamer and the rest of this
|
||||||
|
section concerns reveal.js slideshows.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For reveal.js, you can instead use the reveal.js-native option
|
||||||
|
parallaxBackgroundImage. You can also set parallaxBackgroundHorizontal
|
||||||
|
and parallaxBackgroundVertical the same way and must also set
|
||||||
|
parallaxBackgroundSize to have your values take effect.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To set an image for a particular reveal.js slide, add
|
||||||
|
{data-background-image="/path/to/image"} to the first slide-level
|
||||||
|
heading on the slide (which may even be empty).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
In reveal.js’s overview mode, the parallaxBackgroundImage will show up
|
||||||
|
only on the first slide.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Other reveal.js background settings also work on individual slides,
|
||||||
|
including data-background-size, data-background-repeat,
|
||||||
|
data-background-color, data-transition, and data-transition-speed.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To add a background image to the automatically generated title slide,
|
||||||
|
use the title-slide-attributes variable in the YAML metadata block. It
|
||||||
|
must contain a map of attribute names and values.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
See the reveal.js documentation for more details.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For example in reveal.js:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
title: My Slideshow
|
||||||
|
parallaxBackgroundImage: /path/to/my/background_image.png
|
||||||
|
title-slide-attributes:
|
||||||
|
data-background-image: /path/to/title_image.png
|
||||||
|
data-background-size: contain
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Slide One
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Slide 1 has background_image.png as its background.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## {data-background-image="/path/to/special_image.jpg"}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Slide 2 has a special image for its background, even though the heading has no content.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
EEPPUUBBSS
|
||||||
|
EEPPUUBB MMeettaaddaattaa
|
||||||
|
EPUB metadata may be specified using the --epub-metadata option, but if
|
||||||
|
the source document is Markdown, it is better to use a YAML metadata
|
||||||
|
block. Here is an example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
title:
|
||||||
|
- type: main
|
||||||
|
text: My Book
|
||||||
|
- type: subtitle
|
||||||
|
text: An investigation of metadata
|
||||||
|
creator:
|
||||||
|
- role: author
|
||||||
|
text: John Smith
|
||||||
|
- role: editor
|
||||||
|
text: Sarah Jones
|
||||||
|
identifier:
|
||||||
|
- scheme: DOI
|
||||||
|
text: doi:10.234234.234/33
|
||||||
|
publisher: My Press
|
||||||
|
rights: © 2007 John Smith, CC BY-NC
|
||||||
|
ibooks:
|
||||||
|
version: 1.3.4
|
||||||
|
...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The following fields are recognized:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iiddeennttiiffiieerr
|
||||||
|
Either a string value or an object with fields text and scheme.
|
||||||
|
Valid values for scheme are ISBN-10, GTIN-13, UPC, ISMN-10, DOI,
|
||||||
|
LCCN, GTIN-14, ISBN-13, Legal deposit number, URN, OCLC,
|
||||||
|
ISMN-13, ISBN-A, JP, OLCC.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttiittllee Either a string value, or an object with fields file-as and
|
||||||
|
type, or a list of such objects. Valid values for type are
|
||||||
|
main, subtitle, short, collection, edition, extended.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccrreeaattoorr
|
||||||
|
Either a string value, or an object with fields role, file-as,
|
||||||
|
and text, or a list of such objects. Valid values for role are
|
||||||
|
MARC relators, but pandoc will attempt to translate the human-
|
||||||
|
readable versions (like “author” and “editor”) to the
|
||||||
|
appropriate marc relators.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccoonnttrriibbuuttoorr
|
||||||
|
Same format as creator.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ddaattee A string value in YYYY-MM-DD format. (Only the year is
|
||||||
|
necessary.) Pandoc will attempt to convert other common date
|
||||||
|
formats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
llaanngg (or legacy: llaanngguuaaggee)
|
||||||
|
A string value in BCP 47 format. Pandoc will default to the
|
||||||
|
local language if nothing is specified.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ssuubbjjeecctt
|
||||||
|
A string value or a list of such values.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ddeessccrriippttiioonn
|
||||||
|
A string value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ttyyppee A string value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ffoorrmmaatt A string value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
rreellaattiioonn
|
||||||
|
A string value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccoovveerraaggee
|
||||||
|
A string value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
rriigghhttss A string value.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bbeelloonnggss--ttoo--ccoolllleeccttiioonn
|
||||||
|
A string value. identifies the name of a collection to which
|
||||||
|
the EPUB Publication belongs.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ggrroouupp--ppoossiittiioonn
|
||||||
|
The group-position field indicates the numeric position in which
|
||||||
|
the EPUB Publication belongs relative to other works belonging
|
||||||
|
to the same belongs-to-collection field.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccoovveerr--iimmaaggee
|
||||||
|
A string value (path to cover image).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ccssss (or legacy: ssttyylleesshheeeett)
|
||||||
|
A string value (path to CSS stylesheet).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ppaaggee--pprrooggrreessssiioonn--ddiirreeccttiioonn
|
||||||
|
Either ltr or rtl. Specifies the page-progression-direction
|
||||||
|
attribute for the spine element.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
iibbooookkss iBooks-specific metadata, with the following fields:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• version: (string)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• specified-fonts: true|false (default false)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• ipad-orientation-lock: portrait-only|landscape-only
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• iphone-orientation-lock: portrait-only|landscape-only
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• binding: true|false (default true)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
• scroll-axis: vertical|horizontal|default
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
TThhee eeppuubb::ttyyppee attribute
|
||||||
|
For epub3 output, you can mark up the heading that corresponds to an
|
||||||
|
EPUB chapter using the epub:type attribute. For example, to set the
|
||||||
|
attribute to the value prologue, use this markdown:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# My chapter {epub:type=prologue}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Which will result in:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<body epub:type="frontmatter">
|
||||||
|
<section epub:type="prologue">
|
||||||
|
<h1>My chapter</h1>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pandoc will output <body epub:type="bodymatter">, unless you use one of
|
||||||
|
the following values, in which case either frontmatter or backmatter
|
||||||
|
will be output.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
epub:type of first section epub:type of body
|
||||||
|
───────────────────────────────────────────────
|
||||||
|
prologue frontmatter
|
||||||
|
abstract frontmatter
|
||||||
|
acknowledgments frontmatter
|
||||||
|
copyright-page frontmatter
|
||||||
|
dedication frontmatter
|
||||||
|
credits frontmatter
|
||||||
|
keywords frontmatter
|
||||||
|
imprint frontmatter
|
||||||
|
contributors frontmatter
|
||||||
|
other-credits frontmatter
|
||||||
|
errata frontmatter
|
||||||
|
revision-history frontmatter
|
||||||
|
titlepage frontmatter
|
||||||
|
halftitlepage frontmatter
|
||||||
|
seriespage frontmatter
|
||||||
|
foreword frontmatter
|
||||||
|
preface frontmatter
|
||||||
|
appendix backmatter
|
||||||
|
colophon backmatter
|
||||||
|
bibliography backmatter
|
||||||
|
index backmatter
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
LLiinnkkeedd mmeeddiiaa
|
||||||
|
By default, pandoc will download media referenced from any <img>,
|
||||||
|
<audio>, <video> or <source> element present in the generated EPUB, and
|
||||||
|
include it in the EPUB container, yielding a completely self-contained
|
||||||
|
EPUB. If you want to link to external media resources instead, use raw
|
||||||
|
HTML in your source and add data-external="1" to the tag with the src
|
||||||
|
attribute. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<audio controls="1">
|
||||||
|
<source src="https://example.com/music/toccata.mp3"
|
||||||
|
data-external="1" type="audio/mpeg">
|
||||||
|
</source>
|
||||||
|
</audio>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
JJUUPPYYTTEERR NNOOTTEEBBOOOOKKSS
|
||||||
|
When creating a Jupyter notebook, pandoc will try to infer the notebook
|
||||||
|
structure. Code blocks with the class code will be taken as code
|
||||||
|
cells, and intervening content will be taken as Markdown cells.
|
||||||
|
Attachments will automatically be created for images in Markdown cells.
|
||||||
|
Metadata will be taken from the jupyter metadata field. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
title: My notebook
|
||||||
|
jupyter:
|
||||||
|
nbformat: 4
|
||||||
|
nbformat_minor: 5
|
||||||
|
kernelspec:
|
||||||
|
display_name: Python 2
|
||||||
|
language: python
|
||||||
|
name: python2
|
||||||
|
language_info:
|
||||||
|
codemirror_mode:
|
||||||
|
name: ipython
|
||||||
|
version: 2
|
||||||
|
file_extension: ".py"
|
||||||
|
mimetype: "text/x-python"
|
||||||
|
name: "python"
|
||||||
|
nbconvert_exporter: "python"
|
||||||
|
pygments_lexer: "ipython2"
|
||||||
|
version: "2.7.15"
|
||||||
|
---
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Lorem ipsum
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
|
||||||
|
bibendum felis dictum sodales.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
``` code
|
||||||
|
print("hello")
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Pyout
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
``` code
|
||||||
|
from IPython.display import HTML
|
||||||
|
HTML("""
|
||||||
|
<script>
|
||||||
|
console.log("hello");
|
||||||
|
</script>
|
||||||
|
<b>HTML</b>
|
||||||
|
""")
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Image
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This image ![image](myimage.png) will be
|
||||||
|
included as a cell attachment.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you want to add cell attributes, group cells differently, or add
|
||||||
|
output to code cells, then you need to include divs to indicate the
|
||||||
|
structure. You can use either fenced divs or native divs for this.
|
||||||
|
Here is an example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::::: {.cell .markdown}
|
||||||
|
# Lorem
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
|
||||||
|
bibendum felis dictum sodales.
|
||||||
|
::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=1}
|
||||||
|
``` {.python}
|
||||||
|
print("hello")
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {.output .stream .stdout}
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
hello
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=2}
|
||||||
|
``` {.python}
|
||||||
|
from IPython.display import HTML
|
||||||
|
HTML("""
|
||||||
|
<script>
|
||||||
|
console.log("hello");
|
||||||
|
</script>
|
||||||
|
<b>HTML</b>
|
||||||
|
""")
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {.output .execute_result execution_count=2}
|
||||||
|
```{=html}
|
||||||
|
<script>
|
||||||
|
console.log("hello");
|
||||||
|
</script>
|
||||||
|
<b>HTML</b>
|
||||||
|
hello
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
::::::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you include raw HTML or TeX in an output cell, use the [raw
|
||||||
|
attribute][Extension: fenced_attribute], as shown in the last cell of
|
||||||
|
the example above. Although pandoc can process “bare” raw HTML and
|
||||||
|
TeX, the result is often interspersed raw elements and normal textual
|
||||||
|
elements, and in an output cell pandoc expects a single, connected raw
|
||||||
|
block. To avoid using raw HTML or TeX except when marked explicitly
|
||||||
|
using raw attributes, we recommend specifying the extensions
|
||||||
|
-raw_html-raw_tex+raw_attribute when translating between Markdown and
|
||||||
|
ipynb notebooks.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that options and extensions that affect reading and writing of
|
||||||
|
Markdown will also affect Markdown cells in ipynb notebooks. For
|
||||||
|
example, --wrap=preserve will preserve soft line breaks in Markdown
|
||||||
|
cells; --atx-headers will cause ATX-style headings to be used; and
|
||||||
|
--preserve-tabs will prevent tabs from being turned to spaces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
SSYYNNTTAAXX HHIIGGHHLLIIGGHHTTIINNGG
|
||||||
|
Pandoc will automatically highlight syntax in fenced code blocks that
|
||||||
|
are marked with a language name. The Haskell library skylighting is
|
||||||
|
used for highlighting. Currently highlighting is supported only for
|
||||||
|
HTML, EPUB, Docx, Ms, and LaTeX/PDF output. To see a list of language
|
||||||
|
names that pandoc will recognize, type pandoc
|
||||||
|
--list-highlight-languages.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The color scheme can be selected using the --highlight-style option.
|
||||||
|
The default color scheme is pygments, which imitates the default color
|
||||||
|
scheme used by the Python library pygments (though pygments is not
|
||||||
|
actually used to do the highlighting). To see a list of highlight
|
||||||
|
styles, type pandoc --list-highlight-styles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you are not satisfied with the predefined styles, you can use
|
||||||
|
--print-highlight-style to generate a JSON .theme file which can be
|
||||||
|
modified and used as the argument to --highlight-style. To get a JSON
|
||||||
|
version of the pygments style, for example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --print-highlight-style pygments > my.theme
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Then edit my.theme and use it like this:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --highlight-style my.theme
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you are not satisfied with the built-in highlighting, or you want
|
||||||
|
highlight a language that isn’t supported, you can use the
|
||||||
|
--syntax-definition option to load a KDE-style XML syntax definition
|
||||||
|
file. Before writing your own, have a look at KDE’s repository of
|
||||||
|
syntax definitions.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To disable highlighting, use the --no-highlight option.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCUUSSTTOOMM SSTTYYLLEESS
|
||||||
|
Custom styles can be used in the docx and ICML formats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
OOuuttppuutt
|
||||||
|
By default, pandoc’s docx and ICML output applies a predefined set of
|
||||||
|
styles for blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses largely
|
||||||
|
default formatting (italics, bold) for inlines. This will work for
|
||||||
|
most purposes, especially alongside a reference.docx file. However, if
|
||||||
|
you need to apply your own styles to blocks, or match a preexisting set
|
||||||
|
of styles, pandoc allows you to define custom styles for blocks and
|
||||||
|
text using divs and spans, respectively.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
If you define a div or span with the attribute custom-style, pandoc
|
||||||
|
will apply your specified style to the contained elements (with the
|
||||||
|
exception of elements whose function depends on a style, like headings,
|
||||||
|
code blocks, block quotes, or links). So, for example, using the
|
||||||
|
bracketed_spans syntax,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Get out]{custom-style="Emphatically"}, he said.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
would produce a docx file with “Get out” styled with character style
|
||||||
|
Emphatically. Similarly, using the fenced_divs syntax,
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Dickinson starts the poem simply:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {custom-style="Poetry"}
|
||||||
|
| A Bird came down the Walk---
|
||||||
|
| He did not know I saw---
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
would style the two contained lines with the Poetry paragraph style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For docx output, styles will be defined in the output file as
|
||||||
|
inheriting from normal text, if the styles are not yet in your
|
||||||
|
reference.docx. If they are already defined, pandoc will not alter the
|
||||||
|
definition.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This feature allows for greatest customization in conjunction with
|
||||||
|
pandoc filters. If you want all paragraphs after block quotes to be
|
||||||
|
indented, you can write a filter to apply the styles necessary. If you
|
||||||
|
want all italics to be transformed to the Emphasis character style
|
||||||
|
(perhaps to change their color), you can write a filter which will
|
||||||
|
transform all italicized inlines to inlines within an Emphasis
|
||||||
|
custom-style span.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For docx output, you don’t need to enable any extensions for custom
|
||||||
|
styles to work.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
IInnppuutt
|
||||||
|
The docx reader, by default, only reads those styles that it can
|
||||||
|
convert into pandoc elements, either by direct conversion or
|
||||||
|
interpreting the derivation of the input document’s styles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
By enabling the styles extension in the docx reader (-f docx+styles),
|
||||||
|
you can produce output that maintains the styles of the input document,
|
||||||
|
using the custom-style class. Paragraph styles are interpreted as
|
||||||
|
divs, while character styles are interpreted as spans.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
For example, using the custom-style-reference.docx file in the test
|
||||||
|
directory, we have the following different outputs:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Without the +styles extension:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx -t markdown
|
||||||
|
This is some text.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
This is text with an *emphasized* text style. And this is text with a
|
||||||
|
**strengthened** text style.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
And with the extension:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx+styles -t markdown
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {custom-style="First Paragraph"}
|
||||||
|
This is some text.
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {custom-style="Body Text"}
|
||||||
|
This is text with an [emphasized]{custom-style="Emphatic"} text style.
|
||||||
|
And this is text with a [strengthened]{custom-style="Strengthened"}
|
||||||
|
text style.
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
::: {custom-style="My Block Style"}
|
||||||
|
> Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
|
||||||
|
:::
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
With these custom styles, you can use your input document as a
|
||||||
|
reference-doc while creating docx output (see below), and maintain the
|
||||||
|
same styles in your input and output files.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
CCUUSSTTOOMM WWRRIITTEERRSS
|
||||||
|
Pandoc can be extended with custom writers written in Lua. (Pandoc
|
||||||
|
includes a Lua interpreter, so Lua need not be installed separately.)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
To use a custom writer, simply specify the path to the Lua script in
|
||||||
|
place of the output format. For example:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc -t data/sample.lua
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Creating a custom writer requires writing a Lua function for each
|
||||||
|
possible element in a pandoc document. To get a documented example
|
||||||
|
which you can modify according to your needs, do
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc --print-default-data-file sample.lua
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Note that custom writers have no default template. If you want to use
|
||||||
|
--standalone with a custom writer, you will need to specify a template
|
||||||
|
manually using --template or add a new default template with the name
|
||||||
|
default.NAME_OF_CUSTOM_WRITER.lua to the templates subdirectory of your
|
||||||
|
user data directory (see Templates).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
RREEPPRROODDUUCCIIBBLLEE BBUUIILLDDSS
|
||||||
|
Some of the document formats pandoc targets (such as EPUB, docx, and
|
||||||
|
ODT) include build timestamps in the generated document. That means
|
||||||
|
that the files generated on successive builds will differ, even if the
|
||||||
|
source does not. To avoid this, set the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment
|
||||||
|
variable, and the timestamp will be taken from it instead of the
|
||||||
|
current time. SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should contain an integer unix
|
||||||
|
timestamp (specifying the number of second since midnight UTC January
|
||||||
|
1, 1970).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Some document formats also include a unique identifier. For EPUB, this
|
||||||
|
can be set explicitly by setting the identifier metadata field (see
|
||||||
|
EPUB Metadata, above).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
AA NNOOTTEE OONN SSEECCUURRIITTYY
|
||||||
|
If you use pandoc to convert user-contributed content in a web
|
||||||
|
application, here are some things to keep in mind:
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. Although pandoc itself will not create or modify any files other
|
||||||
|
than those you explicitly ask it create (with the exception of
|
||||||
|
temporary files used in producing PDFs), a filter or custom writer
|
||||||
|
could in principle do anything on your file system. Please audit
|
||||||
|
filters and custom writers very carefully before using them.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
2. If your application uses pandoc as a Haskell library (rather than
|
||||||
|
shelling out to the executable), it is possible to use it in a mode
|
||||||
|
that fully isolates pandoc from your file system, by running the
|
||||||
|
pandoc operations in the PandocPure monad. See the document Using
|
||||||
|
the pandoc API for more details.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
3. Pandoc’s parsers can exhibit pathological performance on some corner
|
||||||
|
cases. It is wise to put any pandoc operations under a timeout, to
|
||||||
|
avoid DOS attacks that exploit these issues. If you are using the
|
||||||
|
pandoc executable, you can add the command line options +RTS -M512M
|
||||||
|
-RTS (for example) to limit the heap size to 512MB.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
4. The HTML generated by pandoc is not guaranteed to be safe. If
|
||||||
|
raw_html is enabled for the Markdown input, users can inject
|
||||||
|
arbitrary HTML. Even if raw_html is disabled, users can include
|
||||||
|
dangerous content in URLs and attributes. To be safe, you should
|
||||||
|
run all the generated HTML through an HTML sanitizer.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
AAUUTTHHOORRSS
|
||||||
|
Copyright 2006–2021 John MacFarlane (jgm@berkeley.edu). Released under
|
||||||
|
the GPL, version 2 or greater. This software carries no warranty of
|
||||||
|
any kind. (See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and warranty notices.) For
|
||||||
|
a full list of contributors, see the file AUTHORS.md in the pandoc
|
||||||
|
source code.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
The Pandoc source code and all documentation may be downloaded from
|
||||||
|
<https://pandoc.org>.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pandoc 2.14.0.3 June 20, 2021 Pandoc User’s Guide()
|
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-01.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 84 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-02.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 173 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-03.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 22 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-04.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 80 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-05.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 128 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-06.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 225 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-07.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 181 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-08.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 132 KiB |
BIN
FR_fr/markdown-guide-img-09.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 46 KiB |
7
FR_fr/markdown-le-mini-guide-before.tex
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
|
|||||||
|
\begin{titlepage}
|
||||||
|
\maketitle
|
||||||
|
\end{titlepage}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\tableofcontents
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
\listoffigures
|
19
FR_fr/markdown-le-mini-guide-headers.heads
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
|
|||||||
|
\usepackage[french]{babel}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[a4paper, left=20mm, right=20mm, top=20mm, bottom=20mm]{geometry}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage{ucs}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage[fontsize=12pt]{fontsize}
|
||||||
|
\usepackage{palatino}
|
||||||
|
%\uspackage{float} % pour positionner les images ?
|
||||||
|
\usepackage{hyperref}
|
||||||
|
\hypersetup{
|
||||||
|
colorlinks=true,
|
||||||
|
linkcolor=blue,
|
||||||
|
urlcolor=brown,
|
||||||
|
filecolor=purple,
|
||||||
|
}
|
||||||
|
\urlstyle{same}
|
||||||
|
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.25}
|
||||||
|
\setlength{\parskip}{1em}
|
||||||
|
\title{Petit guide amateur sur Markdown}
|
||||||
|
\author{\textbackslash{}Moane}
|
||||||
|
%\date{} (à commenter pour date automatique)
|
689
FR_fr/markdown-le-mini-guide.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,689 @@
|
|||||||
|
# `Markdown` : premier tour.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Qu'est-ce que `Markdown` ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le Langage `Markdown` est un *langage de balisage léger* c'est-à-dire un langage où est saisi un *code source* composé de texte *brut*, texte pouvant être ouvert avec tout éditeur ou traitement de textes, voire manipulé par des outils syntaxiques ou *parsers* en anglais.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les caractères saisis sont souvent supportés dans l'un des codages universels en informatique, appelé UTF-8.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pour les personnes non familières, la notion de *code source* renvoie à la programmation informatique où le programme qui s'exécute[^application] est un fichier binaire contenant des 0 et de 1 incompréhensible pour un humain, et le code source est un texte humainement compréhensible pour les initiés. La notion de code source peut-être associée au découplage introduit dans les années 1960 par **Grace Hopper** qui créa le premier *compilateur*[^compilateur] dont le rôle est de traduire le code source en exécutable binaire.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Quel est l'objectif de `Markdown` ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le but de ce langage est de faciliter la création de documents simples ou légèrement complexes en simplifiant la vie du créateur de document par une façon simple de saisir ce code source. Attention cependant, ce fonctionnement peut être très déroutant si vous pensez à la forme en même temps qu'au fond.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`Markdown` n'est pas un traitement de textes au sens actuel communément admis. Il ne se comporte pas comme `Word` de *Microsoft*, `Writer` de *Libreoffice* ou encore `Pages` de *Apple*, ce langage ne se comporte pas comme ces traitements de textes classés dans la famille des **wysiwyg**[^wysiwyg] mais plutôt du **wyciwym**[^wyciwym] ;
|
||||||
|
il doit être compris comme un document qui contient des balises sémantiques, c'est-à-dire des marques indiquant le sens du texte écrit, encadrant ou précédent un bloc ou une ligne de texte.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
En découplant l'esthétique du sens, vous pouvez ainsi travailler sur le document plus librement, vous déchargeant l'esprit, en réduisant le formatage au plus simple et en se concentrant sur le sens, puis ensuite créer le document formaté. Ce découplage permet d'ailleurs d'autres aspects environnementaux intéressants, j'y reviendrai ultérieurement.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
L'éditeur spécial markdown utilise un autre outil qu'il intègre de façon transparente pour l'utilisateur, ce que je désignerai par l'expression de *moteur de rendu*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Le matériel nécessaire pour travailler avec `Markdown` ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Foncièrement, pour éditer du `Markdown` il suffit d'un simple éditeur de textes[^editor], puis de l'installation d'un moteur de rendu markdown, il existe pour tout type de plateforme vu l'engouement pour ce langage auprès de nombreux utilisateurs du milieu informatique.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*Petite anecdote* : J'utilise actuellement un simple éditeur de textes, appelé *mousepad*, qui est très simple dans ses fonctionnalités mais contient exactement celles dont j'ai besoin pour écrire ou programmer.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il s'est également développé des outils plus complets où via un partage de la fenêtre en deux zones différentes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Sous Windows
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* Éditeurs simples :
|
||||||
|
* Bloc Notes
|
||||||
|
* Éditeurs avec visualisateur intégré :
|
||||||
|
* Ghostwriter
|
||||||
|
* Typora
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Sous Mac OS
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* Éditeurs simples :
|
||||||
|
* Éditeurs avec visualisateur intégré :
|
||||||
|
* Typora
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Sous Linux
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* Éditeurs simples :
|
||||||
|
* emacs
|
||||||
|
* vi, vim, gvim, neovim,
|
||||||
|
* nano
|
||||||
|
* etc... (il existe des dizaines d'éditeurs simples)
|
||||||
|
* Leafpad
|
||||||
|
* Geany
|
||||||
|
* Mousepad
|
||||||
|
* GEdit
|
||||||
|
* Éditeurs avec visualisateur intégré :
|
||||||
|
* Typora
|
||||||
|
* ReText
|
||||||
|
* Ghostwriter
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les éditeurs de texte permettent de saisir du code, c'est à dire un texte fait de caractères bruts ou codés de façon totalement universelle. Un code écrit avec n'importe quel éditeur peut être ouvert avec n'importe quel autre ou un traitement de textes ...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Markdown et environnement : un peu de légèreté.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
L'informatique est connue pour être un secteur coûteux et *extrêmement* polluant. Tout le monde n'a pas les moyens de se payer un ordinateur récent et puissant aussi souvent que les programmes les plus *en vogue*, mais nombre d'utilisateurs ont des ordinateurs un peu voire très âgés.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Grâce à ce type d'outil que sont les éditeurs **wyciwym** vous pouvez utiliser un ordinateur même hors d'âge -- sans exagérer non plus -- pour composer le contenu ou sa plus grosse partie et compiler ensuite le rendu sur place ou sur un poste un peu plus puissant, l'éditeur étant normalement et sauf exception, un programme d'empreinte énergétique faible nécessitant des ressources matérielles modestes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*Petite anecdote* : Je compose sur une machine de 12 ans d'âge où la seule modification a été d'augmenter la mémoire vive afin qu'il exécute un système récent.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pour produire ce document, l'éditeur qui est utilisé près de 95 % du temps utilise peu de puissance, lorsque j'ai besoin de voir le rendu, le code source de ce document est alors passé dans une moulinette automatique double qui va le transformer en document tel que vous le lisez. Certaines captures d'écran ultérieures vous montreront des exemples de code source / rendu avec l'un des logiciels que j'utilise.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Les bases de `Markdown`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Généralités et objectifs
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le langage `Markdown` sait prendre en charge des formatages simples, il peut ainsi travailler avec des emphases plus ou moins fortes, des listes numérotées ou non, des cases à cocher ou des tableaux élémentaires ainsi que l'insertion de liens ou d'images, mais aussi l'insertion de citations, de bouts de codes ou de listings informatiques et quelques spécificités. Ces syntaxes basiques peuvent être augmentées par l'ajout d'autres codes issus de langages différents, ceci sera traité à la partie idoine.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Dans cette partie j'exposerai les formatages basiques concernés. Il est important de comprendre qu'ici certains *mauvais* réflexes sont à perdre. Ainsi je ne parlerai pas d'italique mais d'emphase légère et je ne parlerai plus de gras mais d'emphase forte. Ces terminologies sont issues de la typographie classique, qu'on retrouve également dans d'autres langages tels que \TeX{}, \LaTeX{} ou CON\TeX{} par exemple.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Avant de poursuivre, notez que `Markdown` est un langage qui a été développé un peu par à-coups, son côté minimaliste et sa licence libre en a fait un langage *forké*, il existe de nombreuses implémentations de `Markdown` qui sont désignées comme des ``saveurs'' (*flavours* en anglais). Cela se traduit par un fait simple : parfois certains éditeurs ou moteurs de rendu ne traduisent pas toutes les balises car ils s'appuient sur une saveur n'implémentant pas cette balise.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Un exemple tout simple : `~~texte~~` sera traité par un texte barré <s>texte</s> par certains moteurs de rendu alors que d'autres montreront simplement `~~`texte`~~`. D'ailleurs la figure "Même aperçu de balisage dans ghostwriter" vous montre une capture d'écran partielle permettant de voir un balisage où le texte est bien barré par l'utilisation des balises `~~`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![Même aperçu de balisage dans ghostwriter](markdown-guide-img-04.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## La syntaxe d'un balisage textuel
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le balisage textuel, enrichissant du texte et excluant les listes ou l'insertion d'objets ou les tableaux, se fait en collant aux textes et caractères lisibles des balises.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Attention :** Un espace n'est pas un caractère pour le balisage, aussi si vous voulez mettre en italique le mot bidule par exemple, ce code-ci `*bidule*` fonctionnera alors que celui-là `*bidule *` ne fonctionnera pas du fait de la présence d'un espace.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les titres, sous-titres et organisation hiérarchique.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Chaque ligne de titre, sous-titre, sous-sous-titre etc... jusqu'au 5e ou 6e niveau hiérarchique suivant les logiciels et implémentations est à préfixer avec un ou plusieurs caractères `#`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ainsi `# le titre` sera le titre du document, `## le sous-titre` le sous-titre, etc... Voici un exemple de code que je ne génèrerai pas visuellement pour ne pas perturber la numérotation des paragraphes en cours :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
# titre du document
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bla bla bla
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## sous titre
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
re bla bla bla
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## autre sous-titre
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### sous-sous titre
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bla bla bla bla
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### encore un sous-sous titre
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bla bla bla
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## un dernier sous-titre
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
bla bla bla
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Lors de la compilation, les hiérarchies de titres ne sont pas numérotées, sauf à passer le paramètre `--number-sections` à la commande en charge de la compilation du document. C'est ce qui a été fait ici pour la numérotation de toutes les sections, sous-sections et sous-sous-sections, les titres principaux ayant été attribués par une commande supplémentaire aux titres de chapitres.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les paragraphes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Un paragraphe dans markdown commence à un début de ligne. Une fois le paragraphe fini, il suffit de sauter deux lignes pour commencer le suivant.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Exemple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
Ceci est un début de paragraphe bla bla bla bla bla ...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ceci est le paragraphe suivant bla bla bla bla bla ...
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ceci est un début de paragraphe bla bla bla bla bla ...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ceci est le paragraphe suivant bla bla bla bla bla ...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
J'ai souvent tendance à considérer les paragraphes comme un bloc sémantique, *ou objet*, tout comme une liste en est un autre, une image aussi.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les emphases.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les enphases sont typographiquement des mises en valeur de portions de textes. Ces emphases sont *faibles* ou **fortes** et peuvent se coder de deux façons différentes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les emphases faibles.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Une emphase faible peut se créer en encadrant une portion de texte par le symbole `_` ou le symbole `*`, vous pouvez choisir l'une ou l'autre mais ne pouvez - normalement - pas mixer les deux.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Exemple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
_ceci est en italique, emphase légère_ et *ceci aussi* mais *pas ceci * !
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
_ceci est en italique, emphase légère_ et *ceci aussi* mais *pas ceci * !
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La compilation via *pdflatex* pour obtenir le document *pdf* semblant parfois avoir un comportement non conforme à celui attendu par un moteur de rendu html, la capture "Emphases faibles dans ghostwriter" vous montrera à sa droite un aperçu plus conforme à la norme `Markdown`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![Emphases faibles dans ghostwriter](markdown-guide-img-05.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les emphases fortes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Typographiquement, une emphase forte est une forte accentuation du texte, elle est naturellement associée à un caractère **gras**. Cette emphase est entourée d'une double étoile ou d'un double sous-tiret : `**` ou `__` permettant ainsi d'obtenir l'exemple suivant :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
__ceci sera en gras, emphase forte__ tout comme **ceci aussi**.
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnant après compilation :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
__ceci sera en gras, emphase forte__ tout comme **ceci aussi**.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les emphases combinées.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les emphases combinées sont parfois utilisées, il s'agit de texte à la fois en gras et en italique ! Pour cela c'est un encadrement par une triple étoile `***` ou un triple sous-tiret `___` qui encadre la portion de texte.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
___et hop___ et aussi ***et hop***.
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnant après compilation :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
___et hop___ et aussi ***et hop***.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les listes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les listes sont un autre formatage supporté par toutes les implémentations de `Markdown`. Elles sont imbricables les une dans les autres, autrement dit, on peut créer des sous-listes dans les listes. Pour créer une liste il suffit de commencer une nouvelle ligne avec un caractère spécifique après avoir laissé une ligne de séparation avant la liste afin qu'elle soit considérée comme un nouveau bloc sémantique (différent du bloc précédent).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Chaque item de la liste est donc à préfixer d'un caractère suivi d'un espace. Normalement il n'y a pas de caractère à saisir en fin de ligne, du moins à ma connaissance.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les listes non numérotées.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Une liste non numérotée commence par les caractères `*` ou `-`. Ainsi on aura :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
Ceci est une fin de paragraphe
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* item 1
|
||||||
|
* item suivant
|
||||||
|
* encore un item
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Donnant ensuite :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ceci est une fin de paragraphe
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* item 1
|
||||||
|
* item suivant
|
||||||
|
* encore un item
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les listes numérotées
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pour les listes numérotées il suffit d'utiliser les chiffres arabes suivis d'un point et d'un espace. L'exemple suivant illustre ceci :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
ceci est la fin du paragraphe
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. voici le 1er item
|
||||||
|
2. et voici le seconde
|
||||||
|
3. sans oublier le 3e.
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce qui donnera le rendu suivant :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ceci est la fin du paragraphe
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. voici le 1er item
|
||||||
|
2. et voici le seconde
|
||||||
|
3. sans oublier le 3e.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les liste de cases à cocher.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Une liste à cocher contient des cases qui sont générées par le code `- [ ] `, certaines implémentations fonctionnent d'ailleurs plutôt avec `-[ ] `, chacun s'adaptera en fonction de l'outil et de ses exigences. Ainsi :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
- [ ] case à cocher 1
|
||||||
|
- [ ] case suivante
|
||||||
|
- [X] ici la case est déjà cochée
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera le visuel suivant :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
- [ ] case à cocher 1
|
||||||
|
- [ ] case suivante
|
||||||
|
- [X] ici la case est déjà cochée
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Vous me demanderez peut-être pourquoi cette dernière case cochée (je le vois dans votre regard sur l'écran) ? Tout simplement car il existe des programmes ou des applications qui permettent de créer des listes dynamiques (tâches, courses, ...) s'appuyant sur `Markdown` permettant dans un mode de visualisation de cocher ou décocher les cases.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### L'imbrication de listes
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il est possible d'imbriquer des listes entre elles, des listes non numérotées et de listes numérotées, au gré des possibilités de votre imagination. Pour imbriquer une liste, il suffit de décaler par tabulation les lignes avant de commencer à saisir le balisage. Par exemple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
1. bla bla truc
|
||||||
|
2. machin chose
|
||||||
|
1. exemple
|
||||||
|
2. autre exemple.
|
||||||
|
3. exacte solution
|
||||||
|
* sous exemple
|
||||||
|
* sous exemple suivant sans ordre
|
||||||
|
4. traitement du n'importe quoi
|
||||||
|
1. sous exemple
|
||||||
|
2. autre sous exemple
|
||||||
|
* encore un exemple
|
||||||
|
* sans oublier celui-ci
|
||||||
|
3. Continuons.
|
||||||
|
5. revenons au début.
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
1. bla bla truc
|
||||||
|
2. machin chose
|
||||||
|
1. exemple
|
||||||
|
2. autre exemple.
|
||||||
|
3. exacte solution
|
||||||
|
* sous exemple
|
||||||
|
* sous exemple suivant sans ordre
|
||||||
|
4. traitement du n'importe quoi
|
||||||
|
1. sous exemple
|
||||||
|
2. autre sous exemple
|
||||||
|
* encore un exemple
|
||||||
|
* sans oublier celui-ci
|
||||||
|
3. Continuons.
|
||||||
|
5. revenons au début.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les liens et images.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il peut sembler étrange que je range dans la même partie les liens et les images, n'en soyez pas étonné(e), cela vient simplement du formatage utilisé par `Markdown` pour les insérer dans le document.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Avant de commencer ce document, je tiens à signaler que le caractère "¬" qui apparaît parfois dans les listings de code sert à signaler que la ligne de code continue à la ligne suivante mais est saisie en continu dans le monde réel.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Dernier point avant d'attaquer ce qui suit : la conversion par `pdflatex` calcule la position optimale d'une image dans un document afin de rendre son contenu agréable à l'œil, aussi certaines images peuvent ne pas être à l'endroit espéré mais une ou deux pages avant ou après.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les liens (web entre autres)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Un lien - on supposera vers internet - suit la syntaxe suivante :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[texte clicable](url-du-lien "texte alternatif")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Par exemple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Markdown sur Wikipedia](https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Markdown "Page wikipedia consacrée à Markdown")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Donne (le lien ci-dessous est actif, cliquable et peut-être même coloré) un lien que vous pouvez constater car en le survolant avec le curseur de la souris, celle-ci passera de :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[Markdown sur Wikipedia](https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Markdown "Page wikipedia consacrée à Markdown")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Parfois cependant, vous souhaiterez utiliser un lien directement cliquable et visible, vous comprenez facilement qu'écrire quelque chose comme :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[https://le-site-web](https://le-site-web "https://le-site-web")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
est fastidieux, heureusement il existe une syntaxe simplifiée de lien pour cette situation-là :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<https://le-site-web>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Voici un exemple simple pour le site de la NASA, le code source sera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<https://www.nasa.gov/>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Et voici son rendu : <https://www.nasa.gov/>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Notez que** le programme de visualisation du document, qu'il soit en rendu HTML ou que vous l'ayez converti en autre chose (docx, odt, pdf) ouvrira *votre navigateur par défaut*, soyez donc prudent si ce dernier n'est pas à jour.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Notez aussi que** les liens ne sont pas forcément visibles par défaut, ce document (pdf) n'affiche pas les liens par défaut si on ne lui passe pas des paramètres particuliers et des fichiers annexe, voir le chapitre consacré aux réglages et options avancées.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les liens vers des titres de paragraphes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il est possible d'ajouter des liens associés à des paragraphes, la syntaxe est alors simple : autant de dièses que nécessaires pour le niveau hiérarchique suivi du titre du paragraphe et entre accollades sont identifiant de lien. Voici un exemple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### titre de mon paragraphe test {id-test}
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Plus loin dans le texte, pour faire référence à ce paragraphe, il suffit d'utiliser un lien pointant vers lui :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
voir le [paragraphe test](#id-test)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
*Anecdote* : lors de la compilation de ce document, ces balises sont crées afin de créer une table des matières.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Les images.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Une image est une sorte de lien particulier dans markdown. Sa syntaxe se rapproche énormément de la syntaxe d'un lien hypertexte à un détail près, la présence d'un ''!'', la syntaxe est la suivante :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![texte de l'image](chemin-et nom-de-l-image "légende alternative de l'image")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
par exemple, la 1ère image existe, mais pas la 2nde :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
![mon éditeur](makdown-guide-img-01.png "mousepad et un peu de code.")
|
||||||
|
![ma grand-mère](mamie.png "mamie fait du vélo.")
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera une image (mon éditeur) et une image absente visible par son texte (ma grand-mère), attention, l'image peut avoir été déplacée à plus ou moins une ou deux pages avant ou après :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![mon éditeur](markdown-guide-img-01.png "mousepad et un peu de code.")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![ma grand-mère](mamie.png "mamie fait du vélo.")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
L'image "Aperçu dans ghostwriter d'une image absente" vous montre à sa droite en bas, l'aperçu d'une image manquante dans un logiciel dédié à markdown, à savoir `ghostwriter`, qui ne permet certes pas l'impression, mais qui permet la visuation HTML intégrée.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![Aperçu dans ghostwriter d'une image absente](markdown-guide-img-06.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**notez que** le chemin vers le fichier image doit respecter une syntaxe proche de celle de votre système d'exploitation, ainsi sous windows \\ est un séparateur de dossiers, alors que dans MacOS et Linux (issus de la même origine, Unix) on utiliser /.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**notez aussi que** lorsque j'ai utilisé markdown pour produire ce document pdf Markdown ne propose pas tous les réglages très fin que je peux avoir avec \LaTeX{}, du coup, lorsque la compilation se fait, le fichier intermédiaire en \LaTeX{} sera compilé avec son moteur et calculera de lui-même la meilleure place pour positionner les images.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les tableaux élémentaires.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les tableaux simples sont aussi supportés par certaines versions de markdown, pas toutes, dans toutes les implémentations le supportant, sachez cependant que la gestion de l'espace occupée par les cellules est calculée par le contenu le plus long, et que si le tableau déborde de la feuille, `markdown` le fera déborder ! À vous de gérer cela correctement !
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Le tableau le plus simple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Voici un exemple de code pour un tableau élémentaire :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
| Année | 2019 | 2020 | 2021 (prévisions) |
|
||||||
|
| ----- | ---- | ---- | ----------------- |
|
||||||
|
| domotique (Mt) | 123,25 | 200 | 250 |
|
||||||
|
| électroménager (Mt) | 250 | 300 | 350
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
et voici son rendu une fois passé à la moulinette :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| Année | 2019 | 2020 | 2021 (prévisions) |
|
||||||
|
| ----- | ---- | ---- | ----------------- |
|
||||||
|
| domotique (Mt) | 123,25 | 200 | 250 |
|
||||||
|
| électroménager (Mt) | 250 | 300 | 350
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Comme vous le voyez, ce rendu est assez intéressant : la 2e ligne indique bien qu'il s'agit d'un tableau à 4 colonnes (chaque colonne débutant et finissant par | et des - sont inscrits dedans.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Vous aurez remarqué que la largeur de chaque colonne correspond à celle du contenu le plus long en son sein : "électroménéger (Mt)", "123,25", "2020" et "2021 (prévisions)" fixent les largeurs respectives des colonnes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il est possible d'expliquer à `Markdown` comment aligner le contenu des cellules grâce à l'utilisation du caractère ``:'' : Reprenons le code précédent en alignant à gauche la première colonne, au centre la deuxième, par défaut la 3e, et à droite la dernière :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
| Année | 2019 | 2020 | 2021 (prévisions) |
|
||||||
|
| :----- | :----: | ---- | -----------------: |
|
||||||
|
| domotique (Mt) | 123,25 | 200 | 250 |
|
||||||
|
| électroménager (Mt) | 250 | 300 | 350
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
et voici son rendu une fois passé à la moulinette :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
| Année | 2019 | 2020 | 2021 (prévisions) |
|
||||||
|
| :----- | :----: | ---- | -----------------: |
|
||||||
|
| domotique (Mt) | 123,25 | 200 | 250 |
|
||||||
|
| électroménager (Mt) | 250 | 300 | 350
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il est bien évidemment possible de formater plus proprement et finement les tableaux grâce à des options avancées auxquelles je n'ai pas encore jeté il œil. De même, l'alignement de chaque tableau au centre provient du traitement automatique par défaut des tableau par LaTeX{} lors de la conversion.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Notez que** le nombre de caractères à mettre dans la 2e ligne est au moins 3 quitte à en ajouter plus pour que le code soit visuellement plus clair à déchiffrer par l'œil humain. Ainsi `---` suffirait pour un formatage par défaut, `:--` pour un alignement à gauche, `:-:` pour un centrage et `--:` pour un alignement à droite.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Notez aussi que** si dans ce document pdf les tableaux ont un aspect, dans un outil dédié à `Markdown` tel que ghostwriter, les lignes alternent les colorations afin d'améliorer la lisibilité comme vous le constatez à droite de la capture de l'image "tableaux dans ghostwriter"
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![tableaux dans ghostwriter](markdown-guide-img-07.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les citations.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le langage `markdown` permet d'insérer des citations venant d'autres supports ou que l'on souhaite mettre en valeur de façon différente pour les repérer. Ces citations sont à préfixer par le caractère `>`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le code suivant :
|
||||||
|
```markdown
|
||||||
|
texte normal qui précède la citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> Ceci est une citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> > Ceci est une citation de citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> et ceci est à nouveau une citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
texte normal qui suit la citation
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
texte normal qui précède la citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> Ceci est une citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> > Ceci est une citation de citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
> et ceci est à nouveau une citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
texte normal qui suit la citation
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Vous aurez noté que l'aspect est subtil dans le livre compilé, mais avec un logiciel dédié à markdown on aura des signes plus explicites (à droite de l'image) :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![Aperçu d'imbrication de citations dans ghostwriter](markdown-guide-img-08.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les codes et listings (blocs de code)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Markdown est un langage qui a été développé par des développeurs, initialement pour des développeurs, c'est à dire des gens qui souhaitent être efficaces en saisisant du code informatique, aussi l'une des fonctionnalités les plus évidentes consiste à pouvoir insérer des blocs de commandes ou des listings de commandes afin de communiquer entre développeurs, ceci de façon rapide.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le caractère qui est utilisé pour cette tâche est l'accent grave seul :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
ainsi en encadrant un mot ou un bloc de mots :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`exemple`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`encore un autre exemple`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
on obtiendra :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`exemple`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
`encore un autre exemple`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il est également possible pour une ou plusieurs lignes d'activer ce mode de listing ou code en commençant la ligne par une tabulation (mais non suivie d'une étoile ou d'un - sinon cela serait peut-être interprété comme un début de lites à puces.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ainsi :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```langage
|
||||||
|
code 1
|
||||||
|
code 2
|
||||||
|
ligne de code 3
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
donnera :
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
code 1
|
||||||
|
code 2
|
||||||
|
ligne de code 3
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
``langage'' n'est pas du tout obligatoire, mais permet si l'éditeur est très convivial, de colorer les commandes d'après la syntaxe correspondante au langage précisé. Par exemple pour du python, voici le code source :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```python
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
import numpy as np
|
||||||
|
index=0
|
||||||
|
print("Hello world !")
|
||||||
|
while index<=10:
|
||||||
|
print("L'indice actuel est : ",index)
|
||||||
|
index+=1
|
||||||
|
print("merci")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
et voici son rendu :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```python
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
import numpy as np
|
||||||
|
index=0
|
||||||
|
print("Hello world !")
|
||||||
|
while index<=10:
|
||||||
|
print("L'indice actuel est : ",index)
|
||||||
|
index+=1
|
||||||
|
print("merci")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Comme vous le constatez, le rendu contient des parties colorées
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Aller plus loin avec `Markdown`
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Rappel** : `Markdown` n'est qu'une version simplifiée du *HTML*, il est donc capable de gérer les balises html classiques. Pour aller plus loin avec `Markdown` il faut toujours garder à l'esprit la finalité, en effet les extensions complétant ce langage dépendent de l'objectif final et du support.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Par exemple, le rendu de ce docuument sur une des plateformes participatives utilisant *git*[^git], telles que *gitea*, *github* ou *gitlab*, n'aura pas le même rendu et n'offrira pas les mêmes possibilités d'extension que la génération de ce document en *PDF*.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## L'insertion de caractères étendus
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Par défaut, `Markdown` se veut une version simplifiée du langage HTML utilisé dans les pages web, aussi accepte-t-il facilement les caractères étendus ...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Les notes de bas de page
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les notes de bas de page, ou plutôt dans `Markdown` de fin de document, sont à placer par la combinaison de caractères `[^quelquechose]` suite au mot qui doit être explique, et par une ligne débutant par `[^quelquechose]: ` par la suite. Arrangez-vous pour que ces références `quelquechose` soient uniques au sein du document.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
À plusieurs occasions dans ce document j'ai placé quelques notes de bas de page, lorsque l'explication est placée près du texte, le rendu est mauvais lors de la compilation en html, mais bon avec des éditeurs/visualisateurs de Markdown dédiés, aussi ai-je fini par les placer à la fin du document, et dès ce moment-là la compilation du document final a généré correctement les notes en bas des pages correspondantes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## L'insertion de formatages étendus
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
L'insertion de formatage étendus peut se faire de plusieurs façons et à différents niveaux, tout dépend de la finalité et du document final souhaité.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Au niveau du code.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Suivant le moteur de rendu (webengine pour le HTML, pdflatex pour les pdf) les balises de formatages manquantes à `Markdown` se sont ajoutées, évidemment, si elles concernent du formatage compréhensible par le moteur, il l'interprétera, ainsi la balise permettant de mettre du texte en exposant, à savoir `<sup>texte</sup>` ne sera comprise que par un moteur webengine dans un logiciel qui l'appelle pour générer un aperçu.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Si le moteur est autre, comme pandoc + pdflatex, la balise ne sera pas comprise et le texte sera au mieux écrit normalement ou entourer des caractères de balisage, au pire, absent.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Par contre, un balisage comme `^texte^` s'il est compris par le moteur, affichera bien le texte en l'air.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les formatages étendus sont complexes à tous détailler car dépendant à la fois des normes de `Markdown` comprises par le logiciel, que par son moteur de rendu et donc sa finalité.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Un code tel que :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
texte^en l'air^~en bas~<sup>en l'air</sup><sub>en bas</sub>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
sera interprété différemment par le compilateur et son moteur de rendu.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Exemple :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
texte^en l'air^~en bas~<sup>en l'air</sup><sub>en bas</sub>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
### Lors du transcodage / conversion interformats.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Il est possible de personnaliser le rendu, toujours suivant l'outil utilisé pour le transcodage, par l'ajout de fichiers complémentaires ou de lignes non apparentes au sein du code.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Un rendu par WebEngine/HTML utilisera un fichier *Cascades Style Sheet* ou *CSS* qui contiendra des informations pour le formatage visuel de la sémantique. Ce fichier peut être inclus dans le code source, ou bien gardé à part dans un fichier qui peut être appelé pour la génération du visuel final, permettant ainsi d'avoir une charte visuelle homogène sur un projet multifichiers.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Concernant le rendu pandoc/pdflatex il est possible d'ajouter le contenu d'un fichier auxiliaire dans les entêtes du fichier .tex intermédiaire (*headers*), modifiant par exemple la police par défaut, la taille du papier ou des caractères, l'espacement interligne ou entre paragraphe, les marges, etc...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La documentation en ligne vous permettra de créer ainsi à partir d'un document simple comme du markdown, un document de qualité apprécié pour son homogénéité visuelle et ses possibilités.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
**Notez que** c'est lors du transcodage de ce document qu'a été défini le format du papier, la police de caractères par défaut et sa taille ainsi que la classe du document, le formatage des liens etc...
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Équations et bout de codes issus d'autres langages de formatage.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le langage `Markdown` n'est prévu que pour supporter des formatages et inclusions légères issues du langage de formatage du web appelé HTML[^html], certaines extensions sont ajoutables par l'utilisation d'autres moteurs tels que *webengine* ou *pdflatex* avec des rendus très différents parfois.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Donc _nativement_ `Markdown` ne sait pas gérer des équations ni des formules mathématiques, tout comme certains visualisateurs, ainsi si je souhaite saisir la formule de l'énergie cinétique d'un corps, qui est notée E~C~ et qui vaut la 1/2 multipliée par la masse "m" et la vitesse au carré v^2^ je n'aurai rien de bien visible.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Si j'utilise une visualisation ou une sortie en HTML, je pourrai m'en sortir par le code :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
E<sub>C</sub> = <sup>1</sup>/<sub>2</sub> x m x v<sup>2</sup>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Si utilise une sortie en pdf via pdflatex et pandoc je pourrai utiliser directement du code issu du \LaTeX{} qui sera interprété nativement lors de la deuxième conversion interne latex $\rightarrow$ pdf, le code qui suit :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$$
|
||||||
|
E_C = \dfrac{1}{2} \times m \times v^2
|
||||||
|
$$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
donnera une fois compilé :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
$$
|
||||||
|
E_C = \dfrac{1}{2} \times m \times v^2
|
||||||
|
$$
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Je pourrai donc utiliser les balises `$$` ou `\[` ou encore un `\begin{equation}` si je souhaite que les équations soient numérotées.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
## Créer des documents relativement complexes.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Vous lisez - normalement - un livre avec plusieurs chapitres n'est-il pas ? Si je vous disait que ce document a été généré à partir d'un seul fichier de code markdown et que le chapitrage, le formatage et des outils fins de présentation sont dus soit à la présence de fichiers annexes, soit au passage d'options à un outil de conversion de formats de document appelé `pandoc` me croiriez-vous ?
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Si la réponse est affirmative bravo ! Si elle est négative c'est dommage ! La quasi-totalité de ce document a été généré à partir d'un unique document markdown en compilant avec la ligne de commande qui suit :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
```bash
|
||||||
|
moane@balrog ~]$ pandoc -f markdown -t pdf markdown-le-mini-guide.md ¬
|
||||||
|
-o markdown-le-mini-guide.pdf --top-level-division=chapter ¬
|
||||||
|
--number-sections -H markdown-le-mini-guide-headers.heads ¬
|
||||||
|
-B markdown-le-mini-guide-before.tex
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Le rendu ? En voici une capture d'écran :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![Deux pages du livre actuel](markdown-guide-img-02.png "Le guide actuel")
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Je vous explique rapidement la syntaxe qui hormis la position du premier terme suivant le caractère \$ n'a pas vraiment d'importance :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
* `pandoc ` : nom de la commande à exécuter
|
||||||
|
* `-f markdown` : *from* (depuis) markdown, la liste des formats disponibles est accessible par la commande `pandoc --list-input-formats`
|
||||||
|
* `-t pdf` : *to* (vers) pdf, la liste des formats disponibles est accessible par la commande : `pandoc --list-output-formats`
|
||||||
|
* `markdown-le-mini-guide.md` : le nom du fichier à traiter
|
||||||
|
* `-o markdown-le-mini-guide.pdf` : *output* à envoyer vers le fichier dont le nom suit le `-o`
|
||||||
|
* `--top-level-division=chapter` : indique à pandoc que les balises `#` doivent être considérées comme des chapitres, et définit alors le document pdf qui sera généré comme un rapport ou un livre
|
||||||
|
* `--number-sections` : indique à pandoc que les sections et sous-sections sont à numéroter tout au long du document. Si la commande `--top-level-division` n'est pas précisée, la classe du document est alors **article** et a numérotation commence à la section "1."
|
||||||
|
* `-H markdown-le-mini-guide-headers.heads` : inclus le fichier dans les entêtes (*headers*) du document afin de modifier l'apparence, ici le fichier d'extention .heads contient une série de commandes de formatages en \LaTeX{} s'appliquant dans l'ensemble du document
|
||||||
|
* `-B markdown-le-mini-guide-before.tex` : inclus le fichier (ici .tex) au début du corps du document généré, avant le code source. Dans l'exemple de ce manuel, cela a inclus la page de titre, celle avec la table des matières ainsi que celle avec la liste des figures.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Bien sûr d'autres options sont disponibles, il suffit d'ouvrir un terminal et de saisir la commande :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
man pandoc
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
pour pouvoir lire la documentation complète.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
# Notices légales.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Ce document a été rédigé pour la quasi-totalité de son contenu en langage `markdown` afin que vous puissiez voir les possibilités natives de ce langage.
|
||||||
|
C'est ainsi que j'ai utilisé un ordinateur manufacturé en 2008, dont seule la mémoire vive a été passée de 4 à 8 Go, système sur lequel tourne une version à jour d'`Arch linux` (en date du 4 sept. 2021) faisant tourner un environnement graphique `XFCe 4.16`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Afin de me mettre dans les conditions les moins favorables à son fonctionnement j'ai décidé d'utiliser un éditeur graphique simple, `mousepad` version 0.5.6 fourni dans `XFCe` dont la capture d'écran est visible précédemment dans ce document dont la seule amélioration par rapport à un éditeur encore plus basique est la coloration syntaxique d'après le type de fichier détecté, aucune aide de saisie n'est offerte par cet outil.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![À propos de l'éditeur mousepad](markdown-guide-img-03.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Pour les fichiers de formatage fin j'ai utilisé des bouts de langage \LaTeX{} dans les entêtes (*headers*) et le fichier avant celui-ci (*before*) pour la page de présentation, le sommaire et la liste des figures incluses.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
La compilation de ce document a été générée par `pandoc` :
|
||||||
|
```bash
|
||||||
|
pandoc 2.14.0.2
|
||||||
|
Compiled with pandoc-types 1.22, texmath 0.12.3, skylighting 0.10.5.1,
|
||||||
|
citeproc 0.4.0.1, ipynb 0.1.0.1
|
||||||
|
User data directory: /home/anonymous/.local/share/pandoc
|
||||||
|
Copyright (C) 2006-2021 John MacFarlane. Web: https://pandoc.org
|
||||||
|
This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is no
|
||||||
|
warranty, not even for merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
Pour la conversion en \LaTeX{} il a été utilisé `pdflatex` aussi appelé `pdfTeX` :
|
||||||
|
```bash
|
||||||
|
pdfTeX 3.141592653-2.6-1.40.22 (TeX Live 2021/Arch Linux)
|
||||||
|
kpathsea version 6.3.3
|
||||||
|
Copyright 2021 Han The Thanh (pdfTeX) et al.
|
||||||
|
There is NO warranty. Redistribution of this software is
|
||||||
|
covered by the terms of both the pdfTeX copyright and
|
||||||
|
the Lesser GNU General Public License.
|
||||||
|
For more information about these matters, see the file
|
||||||
|
named COPYING and the pdfTeX source.
|
||||||
|
Primary author of pdfTeX: Han The Thanh (pdfTeX) et al.
|
||||||
|
Compiled with libpng 1.6.37; using libpng 1.6.37
|
||||||
|
Compiled with zlib 1.2.11; using zlib 1.2.11
|
||||||
|
Compiled with xpdf version 4.03
|
||||||
|
```
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Les captures d'écran ont été réalisées par l'outil `xfce4-screenshooter` livré avec `XFCe` et retouchées le cas échéant par l'éditeur de dessins `kolourpaint`.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Certaines captures d'écran montrent l'aperçu du code dans un éditeur dédié nommé ghostwriter :
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
![À propos de ghostwriter](markdown-guide-img-09.png)
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
Tous ces logiciels sont l'une des licences vertueuses et libre, ils sont légalement gratuits (même si la licence libre n'implique pas la gratuité).
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^application]: Dans la terminologie moderne où les *intelliphones* règnent en maîtres absolus dans une grand partie de la population, il n'y a plus vraiment de distinction entre la terminologie de programme, sous-entendu exécutable binaire, et application qui correspond à l'application d'un concept théorique sur une utilisation pratique.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^compilateur]: Un compilateur est un exécutable (programme, application) dont le rôle est de traduire un code source humainement compréhensible en exécutable compréhensible par la machine. L'application contraire existe mais la décompilation d'un exécutable protégé par licence logicielle est le plus souvent interdite.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^wysiwyg]: WYSIWYG : What You See Is What You Get (Ce que vous voyez est ce que vous aurez) ... *ou presque*. La majorité des logiciels de traitement de texte sont actuellement WYSIWYG, au fur et à mesure que vous saisissez votre document, il s'affiche à l'écran avec l'aspect qu'il devrait normalement avoir.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^wyciwym]: WYCIWYM : What You Code Is What You Mean (Ce que vous voyez est le sens que vous lui donnez). Dans ce mode de fonctionnement, vous vous déchargez l'esprit de la présentation obtenue en vous concentrant sur le sens de ce qui est écrit, vous définissez vos sections, vos emphases, vos listes, vos tableaux ou autres graphiques plus ou moins complexes, et lors de la compilation du code source en document final, c'est le compilateur qui, en fonction des sens donnés et des paramètres de formatage définis dans les entêtes, se chargera de traduire au mieux votre pensée dans un document graphiquement homogène et agréable à parcourrir.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^editor]: Un éditeur de textes est un programme qui écrit du texte simple, sans formatage. Son but est de manipuler du texte dit brut, en effectuant des recherches, des remplacement ou de l'édition. Sa caractéristique évoluant avec les usages récents, il peut cependant aussi montrer un formatage visuel pour aider l'utilisateur, formatage qui ne se traduit pas sur le document produit. Normalement son but est d'être léger en mémoire même si l'un des plus en vogue chez les programmeurs, *neovim* est très ... vorace en ressources.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^html]: HTML pour HyperText Markup Language ou langage de balisage hypertextuel, utilisé pour générer des textes transformables en liens hypertexte. C'est ce simple outil qui a permis le développement du web moderne en liant les pages les unes aux autres.
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
[^git]: git (avec un g dur) est un système de gestion de versions de fichiers, décentralisé et très utilisé dans les milieux informatiques pour du développement en commun. <https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Git>. D'après le magazine PC-World qui avait interviewé son concepteur, *git* qui est l'équivalent anglais de *connard* a été utilisé car l'auteur se considère un peu comme un sale égoïste et un connard.
|